Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

M5 Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW M5. Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request: Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW M5's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW M5 throughout an extended ser- vice life. This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. We wish you an enjoyable driving experience. BMW AG © 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 014 238 US English VIII/07, 07 09 500 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 7 4 Using this Owner's Manual the index, refer to page tofind fastest way specific The is topics to use Contents 169 168 162 159 152 148 Entertainment 145 136 124 122 Navigation 119 114 Driving tips 104 97 92 78 66 56 53 41 28 Controls 23 16 10 glanceAt a Reporting safety defects Notes USB/audio interface USB/audio AUX-In connection CDplayer and CDchanger Satellite radio Radio and tone On/off … if do to What Destination guidance Destination entry system navigation Starting EngineeringBMW M5 Things to remember when driving Practical interior accessories Climate Lamps safety and Technology for comfort, convenience Everything under control Driving Transporting childrensafely Adjusting Opening and closing system command Voice iDrive Cockpit 238 . 238 233 230 Reference 223 214 212 206 200 198 Mobility 189 174 Communications Everything from toZ from A Everything system Short commands of voice command Technical data assistance receiving and Giving Replacing components Maintenance hood the Under Wheels and tires Refueling Assist BMW Telephoning

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Notes vehicle. well; it is an important component of your as remember to hand over the Owner's Manual Should you sell your someBMW day, please this find in firstthe chapter. will you vehicle, your of overview initial an gain atthe index manual. ofthe back wishIf you to specific to is toreferfind topics detailed to the way The quicklyfastest as possible. as Manual are able to find what you need in this Owner's haveWe made every effort to ensure that you Manual Using thisOwner's Notes nology, onthenology, Internet atwww.bmwusa.com. tech- on e.g. BMW, on information find can You BMW center will be happytoadvise you. Should you have any other questions, your Additional sources of information 4 for your vehicle. vehicle and enable you to care more effectively the vehicle. to damage serious and injury ofpersonal sibility information on a particular part or assembly. or part particular a on information tion. < voice command system. command voice {{ system. command { individualselect functions. to used texts Control Display Identifies "..." ofprinting.time andfunctions not equipment available yet at the cific equipment and optional extras, as well as * Symbols used Symbols on vehicle components vehicle on Symbols ...... Indicates special equipment, country-spe- equipment, special Indicates } Marks the end of a specificMarks a end of theitem informa- of }} Verbal instructions to use with the voice the with use to instructions Verbal Identifies the answers generated by the help protect the environment. to taken that canbe to measures Refers your optimum benefitfrom gaining the in Indicates informationthat willassist you lowed precisely in order toavoid the pos- be Indicates that must fol- precautions evant section ofthis Owner's for Manual Indicates consultthat should you rel- the < < < The individual vehicle For your own safety When purchasing your BMW, you have decided Maintenance and repairs in favor of a model with individualized equip- ment and features. This Owner's Manual Advanced technology, e.g. the use of glance a At describes all equipment and features offered modern materials and high-performance for the BMW M5. electronics, requires specially adapted mainte- nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor- Please bear in mind that the manual may con- responding work on your BMW performed only tain information on accessories and equipment by your BMW center or a workshop that works that you have not specified for your own vehicle. according to BMW repair procedures with cor- Sections describing options and special equip- respondingly trained personnel. If this work is Controls ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in not carried out properly, there is a danger of identifying possible differences between the subsequent damage and related safety haz- descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- ards.< cle's equipment. If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals. Driving tips

Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that

our vehicles continue to embody the highest Navigation quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible that the features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle. Entertainment Communications Mobility

5 Reference Notes center for additional information. additional for center Warranty. Limited See BMW yourthe BMW of validity the affect or system, electrical cle's with the interfere vehi- safety, its compromise like may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, CBs, walkie-talkies, as such hamradios or the transceiver or antenna, equipment mounted the within usingvehicle anexternally without including operation anyof mobile phone from telephones, shields, dust brake components, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension radios, asalarms, such accessories approved Installation and operationof non-BMW are available from all centers.BMW with professional advice on using these items, other products approvedby togetherBMW, and Accessories BMW Parts, BMW Genuine occupants. its or operation its cle, andwithout safely risk BMW to theeither vehi- manufacturers toverify ifit canbe used ona every productcannot test byBMW made other BMW. by approved ries not resulting from installation of parts and accesso- liability notaccept any will damage for BMW defects in material and workmanship. BMW warrants these parts to be free from vehicle. your on ensure optimum performance when installed have thoroughly to they been BMW by tested that assurance the acquire simultaneously you andGenuineapproved byBMW BMWParts, and tested accessories purchase you When tified automotive part. automotive tified repair establishment or individual using anycer- automotive performedby any be may tems Parts and accessoriesParts and and accessories approvedby BMW. parts genuine use safety, your own For the emission control devices and sys- and devices control emission the Maintenance, replacement, or repair of 6 < < soap and water. and soap protect your skin by washing thoroughly with caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always have engine chemicalsthat oil contains Used your hands after handling. Wash ries lead and contain compounds. accesso- andrelated terminals posts, Battery reproductive harm. to cause cancer and birth defects or other emit chemicals known to the State of California certain products of componentwear contain or certainaddition, fluidsin contained vehicles and and birth defects and reproductive harm. In cancer to cause of California State to the known nishings ina vehicle, contain or emit chemicals including found in components interiorthe fur- warning: following the issue to us requires law California California Proposition 65 Warning automobile components and parts, Engine exhaust and a wide variety of < Service and warranty Reporting safety defects We recommend that you read this publication For US customers thoroughly.

The following applies only to vehicles owned glance a At Your BMW is covered by the following warran- and operated in the US. ties: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect > New Vehicle Limited Warranty which could cause a crash or could cause injury > Rust Perforation Limited Warranty or death, you should immediately inform the > Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, > Federal Emissions Performance Warranty NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Controls > California Emission Control System Limited Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831- Warranty 1117. Detailed information about these warranties is If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may listed in the Service and Warranty Information open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

a recall and remedy campaign. However, Driving tips NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- Navigation trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Entertainment Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact

Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Communications Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca Mobility

7 Reference

At a glance

This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems. Cockpit 5 4 3 Around the steering wheel: controls and displays Cockpit 1 2 Folding exterior mirrors in and out and in mirrors exterior Folding Automatic curb monitor Automatic Adjusting exterior mirrors exterior Adjusting windows closing and Opening Rearwindow safety switch Sun blind * 10 for rear window rear for * 48 48 38 105 37 * 48 6 Parking lamps Computer Check Control High-beam assistant High-beam flasher High beams, headlamp Turn signals 67 62 * 71 94 * 94 94 15 10 14 11 8 7 9 13 12 Buttons on steering wheel onsteering Buttons Shift paddles Instrument cluster Horn, entiresurface Ignition lock Cruise control Steeringadjustment wheel command system Activating/deactivating voice Volume > Windshield wipers Steeringheater wheel on/off ignition Switching Starting/stopping engine and sensor Rain Individually programmable settings MDrive, call up individual with numbers phone stored lists in and book phone in Scrolling track music Selecting Changing radio station > Mobile phone Press and hold: redialing selected redialing if no phone number is selected phone number and call, starting dialing starting call, Press: accepting and ending 56 61 50 12 63 * 65 174 * 63 : 23 * * 163 152 for 49 56 50 49

20 19 18 17 16 Releasing hood Adaptive Head Light Head Adaptive headlampAutomatic control Instrument lighting High-beam assistant High-beam Daytime running lamps beams Low lamps Parking Daytime running lamps Head-Up Display lid compartmentOpening luggage 33 206 92 11 92 * 89 * 96 * * * 94 94 93 93 92

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Cockpit 6 5 4 Instrument cluster 3 2 1 > > > Display for Engine oil thermometer Tachometer Indicator and warning lamps Speedometer turn signals for Indicator lamps Speed of cruise control Indicator warninglamps and Engine oil level Computer 12 66 67 208 67 65 13 71 9 8 7 Resetting trip odometer Resetting Fuel gauge > > > > > > Display for High-beam assistant High-beam service requirements for distancetravel remaining and Date Odometer and trip odometer transmission manual for level oil Engine Drivelogic with Transmission Sequential Manual Check Control message present message Control Check 67 59 * 208 * 66 94 69 66 71 The concept The Indicator andwarning lamps trol, refer topage trol, refer Con- Check the displayed via canbe action take malfunction andonthe corresponding need to Additional information, e.g.onthe cause ofa lamps. warning and indicator played thetrol explain Display meaning of dis- the Text messages at the bottom edgeof the Con- Explanatory text messages or when the ignition is switched on. briefly lighting upduring starting ofthe engine Some lamps are tested for proper function by colors. and combinations different in up light can lamps warning and indicator The 71 . functions: The following indicator lamps signal particular Indicator lamps without text messages as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on. the corresponding lamp soonas comes as willbe shown this information In urgentcases, models Canadian for levels emissions deteriorating with malfunction Engine levels emissions deteriorating with malfunction Engine M Dynamic Mode MDrive stability vehicle for maintaining forces DSC controls the drive and braking flashes: Lamp models Handbrake applied forCanadian Handbrake applied High beams/headlamp flasher Parking lamps/low beams 51 213 80 213 13 80 58 92 94

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Cockpit Around the center console: controls anddisplays 14 3 2 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 9 8 4 15 14 1 SOS: initiatingSOS: lamps Reading > Professional Drive for navigation system DVD with > Ejecting > > Changing Automatic climate control Control Display lamp airbag status Passenger Interior lamps Central locking system locking Central Hazard warningflashers Glass sunroof Glass Drive for audio CDs buttons Programmable memory/direct selection and for voice command system command for voice and telephone for mode for Microphone hands-free audio CD audio navigation DVD navigation track station radio condensation Defrosting windows and removing Air volume Maximum cooling control/recirculated-air mode recirculated-air Automatic AUC Cooling function volume airAutomatic distribution and Temperature setting,left/right Rear window defroster window Rear 21 148 * * navigation system navigation * 148

an emergency request , electric 96 96 98 16 148 *

99 148 148

99 32 38

100 97 100 88 *

97 122 23

100 223 98

25 17 18 16 19 24 23 22 21 20 > > MDM Controller volume adjusting on/off and output sound Switching Entertainment Opening start menu on Control Display directions four in horizontally move or press Turn, transmission EDC Electronicmanual Control Damper for Transmission Manual Sequential Engine Dynamic Control for POWER M Transmission Manual Sequential for Control Stability Dynamic OFF DSC Transmission Manual Sequential Control Electronic for EDC Damper Transmission Drivelogic of Sequential Manual transmission manual in off and on DSC Switching transmission M Dynamic Mode formanual lid compartmentOpening luggage width active backrest Adjusting PDC Park DistancePDC Park Control FlatMonitor Tire Active seat ventilation Heated seats * 16 * 33 * 61 82 43 81 80 15 46 * 83 148 * 47 59 81 82 * 78 17

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive unless traffic and road conditions allow. conditions road and traffic unless controls entries to use the make attempt or cle's occupants and toother road users: never Controls section provides anintroduction tobasic menu following The position. central a from operated of switches. This allows these functions to be iDrive combines the functions of a large number iDrive 3 2 1 > > > settings: make and items With the controller youcan select menu Controller Opening start menu Control Display due toinattention, due toyour both vehi-own To avoid posing anunnecessary hazard press, arrow arrow turn, arrows in four directions, move button 16 5 6 4 < vant equipment.vant tions is described in connection with the rele- individualfunc- the The controlof navigation. > > Navigation oronboardinformation > > Communication Menu overview > > > > > > > > > Climate > > > > Entertainment menu h average fuel consumption the displaying for e.g. information, Onboard system Navigation Assist BMW Telephone Settings for telephone for Settings lines for legally mandated inspections dead- and intervals ofmaintenance Display for the central locking system or MDrive, for your vehicle, e.g. for Settings Tone and display settings Switching off ControlDisplay operationParked car distribution heater Seat programs Automatic settings Vent interface USB/audio AUX-In connection player changer CD CD and Radio * * or TeleService * * * * * prx 0seconds. 10 approx. hidden is automatically after message The This displays menu. start the Press the controller. To hide themessage: play: lowing message is shown on the Control Dis- page to refer readiness, radio From Operating principle rs h buttontwice. the Press button. menu: the the from To open start menu the Press start menu Opening items. five menu You can call up all thefunctions of iDrive using menu Start 17 56 , the fol-

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive Opening menu items of start menu start of items menu Opening onds. sponding direction and holditfor approx.2 sec- To do so, move the controller in the corre- > > you: offers opening Comfort items of menu openingComfort troller. menu by pressing the con- You can open the left, rear. front right, or the ment and Climate bymoving the controller to Entertain- Navigation, Communication, items the With you start menu menu the can open ihu rsigte button without thepressing andClimate Entertainment Navigation, Direct changing between Communication, shown display last the Opening of a menu item of the start menu in 18 3 2 1 2 1 Displays in menu numerically. or graphically displayed are Settings currently visible. are not that items menu other of accessing In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility lists. vertical or tal Menu items are usually grouped in horizon- menu: start the of item last selected the menu indicates A symbol respective active field is highlighted. The Each menuis divided into fields. Climate Entertainment information onboard or Navigation Communication menu 3 2 1 view. this in described is iDrive via operation Basic Operating principle at a glance Selecting menu item: refer to to refer item: menu Selecting > > item:Activating menu > > item: menu Selecting function is out carried New menuitems are displayed or the Presscontroller the selectedhighlighting by be can white in shown items Menu Turn the controller; highlight the moves 1 5 4 page onControl to Settingtings Display, time, refer You can view the individual steps under Set- > > > settings: Adjusting > > > Changing between fields: 75 Confirmation byConfirmation changing field displays can be changed text or value numerical display, Graphic Turn controller Active fieldActive lighterappears Release controller forward or back right, left, controller the move Briefly . 19

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive 3 2 inputs via the voice command via inputs system voice command the when there are Check Control instructions or hidden temporarily is information status The Other displays: 6 4 5 Status information 1 received is traffic information thattransmits Station sound off output Entertainment Time mobile phone network, dependenton phone is paired in the vehicle > Display for: > igation system for nav- oftraffic information the Reception "TI": > > > Display for: Telephoning rmBWAssist BMW from Existingconnection voicea service with "BMW Assist" "BMW search or no network Name of linked mobile phone, network Telephone CD Radio, Entertainment: Reception strength ofmobile phone Newentries present in"Missedcalls" Roaming active Roaming * 20 : *

* is possible and activated in "Communication": is possible if the mobile * : * . * Selecting display > > > tance window: the assis- in appears information Additional Assistance window* 3. 2. 1. The current position system The arrow or map view with a navigation The computer or the trip computer Press the controller. Select amenuitem. troller. assistancethe window and presscon- the to controller change the right tothe to Move * 2. 1. Switchingwindow assistance off/on 3. 2. 1. off/on Switching Control Display and press the controller. switchTo the on, change to assistance window Toswitch on, presscontroller. the controller. the press and off" window "Assist. Select troller. con- the press and window assistance the to change rightto the to controller the Move ler. Select "Display andpress off" the control- menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press control currently in use. direct selection buttonsis stored thefor remote The assignment of the programmable memory/ Destinations of navigation Destinations function Saving > > > buttons: on the programmable memory/direct selection You cansave andrun certain functions ofiDrive direct selection buttons memory/ Programmable name will also stored. be also will name nameIf is a assigned to the phone number, the 2. 1. numbers phone Telephone, > > features: Special 2. 1. > > > > Entertainment: Telephone, phone numbers navigation of Destinations Press the ... button button longer ... than 2seconds. the Press list. A-Z of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the Enter theselect phone numberor list it ina current destination. notthe stored, are cursor atthe coordinates During destination entry via a map, the tion isstored. button longer the viewmap started, the current destina- With the destination guidance system and ... than 2seconds. the Press destination list or theaddress book. Select navigation destination, e.g. in the AUX CD compartment of CD changer ofCD compartment CD CD radio station 21 *

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive compressed audio files. audio compressed 2. 1. play. regardless of the selection on the Control Dis- stored, is station, aradio e.g. heard, currently In the the menu, Entertainment sound source Entertainment oc h . button. ... is displayed. buttons ofthe assignment The the Touch Displaying short info an e.g. object, pen, doesa notfunction. not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with touchingby with your them finger. do Please ofthe candisplay buttons You the assignment Displaying button assignment button. selected. is anavigation destination when started is ance tion established, or also is the guid-destination ... When selecting a phone number, the connec- the Press function Run Notassigned Telephone, phonenumber source Entertainment Destination of navigation system Press the ... button longer longer button ... than 2 seconds. the Press ortion CD. Select the desired function, radioe.g. sta- the currentthe with is track CDs for stored If the vehicle is equipped with two drives, 22 < 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. button longer. 1. ... Deleting button assignments the Touch Displaying detailedinformation Acknowledge with "Yes". keys" presscontroller. and the Select "Delete assignment of all memory press the controller. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press rearview mirror,refer page to located the ofthemicrophone in area interior The voice command system uses a special ofinstructions or form questions. selected systems and provides support in the signals the control for into oral commands The voice command system transforms your touse having controller.the can be spoken as commands. This frees you of Display Control the on items menu Individual out taking your hands off the steering wheel. with- ofvarious vehicle trolsystems operation The voice command system allows you to con- The concept system command Voice Symbols in Owner's Manual in Symbols page to refer iDrive, of language the Toset ofthetification commands. spoken voice command system in order to enable iden- language iDrive,Via the set the for thatapplies Precondition {{ word. command system. { ...... } }} Say the specified commands word for for word commands specified the Say Indicates responses of the voice voice ofthe responses Indicates 14 . 77 . when when caninputyou additional commands. 2. 1. Activating voice command system Voice commands This symbol is shown on the Control Display Display Control onthe shown is symbol This Display. The iscommand displayed on the Control Say the command. mands. command system can respond tocom- voice you the signal tell that an acoustic button. the Press * This symbol on the Control Display and and Display Control the on symbol This 23

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Voice command system ate the equipment via iDrive. via equipment the ate If no other commands are possible, then oper- Having possible commands read aloud Commands buttononthe steering wheel or the Press system command Terminating orcancelingvoice Opening startmenu topage refer selected, is item menu which of regardless directly, tions shortWith commands youcanrun certain func- commands short with directly functions Running e.g.: function, There are oftenanumber run commands a to of Using alternative commands Opening help changer for operating the CD player and the CD system willaloud readthe possible commands For example, if you have selected "CD", the mands: com- possible the list system the have To item on the Control Display. related tothe selectedble menu commands You can have the system read aloud thepossi- { { { { { Cancel Options Help Main menu Radio on Radio * . } } } 24 } or } { Turn radioTurn on 233 . } 5. 2. 1. Example: selecting atrack rs h buttonon the steering wheel. Pressthe buttonon the steering wheel. Pressthe necessary. outputif sound Switch onEntertainment 6. 4. 3. {{ says: system The { track, e.g.: Select {{ says: system The { {{ says: system The { rc 1 Track CD Entertainment rc 1 Track CD on Entertainment } }} } }}

} }} > > > > > > mind: For voice commands, bear the following in page Notes while speaking. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle ambient noise. roof Keep the doors, windows and glass sun- abbreviations. voice command system and do not use in the book, only names ofthe use language entries For the phone in voice-activated common pronunciation of the station name. When selecting a radio station, use the the voice command system. Always issue commands in the language of spelling when entering the destination. emphasis This andpauses. also applies to excessive avoiding volume, atnormal and Say the commands and numbers smoothly 185 with voice commands, refer to refer commands, voice with The mobile phone canalso beoperated * . closed prevent interference to from < 25

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle. Its extensive array of features and accessories, both for driving and for your own safety, comfort and convenience, are described here. Opening and closing vice invice remote control,data page also stored in the remote control, refer to Ser- Information on the required for maintenance is page Profile, Personal to refer tings are activated and executed in the vehicle, by the vehicle during unlocking, different set- Depending onwhich remotecontrol is detected tains areplaceable battery, refer topage Keys/remote controlKeys/remote andclosing Opening Press button Press Integrated key For comfort access thecharged. battery tokeep ayear twice least longer distance with each remotecontrol at charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a acontains batteryis remotecontrol which Each Remote control with integrated key 3 2 1 ment Adapter for spare key, in glove compart- Spare key control with integrated key Remote 28 1 to unlock the key. the unlock to * , the remote control con- , the remote 28 . 212 . 37 . Adapter for spare key spare for Adapter locks. The spare key and integrated key fit the same wallet. This key is not intended for regular use. Store the spare key in a safe place such as your Spare key available at your BMW center. key controls are with anintegrated remote replace additional new or keys, To obtain lost remote New controls the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding in withoutuse you having todo anything. When currently control remote thefor stored are tings Personal Profile ensures that most of these set- individually according to your preferences. You canset anumberoffunctions your of BMW concept The ProfilePersonal use. adapter before the the key andslide into spare compartment glove the in the holder from the adapter Remove can beswitched on. radio readiness or key spare the with started be is adapter The required so that vehiclethe can > > key fits the integrated The locks: following Driver's door, topage door, refer Driver's Glove compartment, refer topage refer compartment, Glove 32 106 > > > > > Personal Profile settings stored for a ofmaximum four remote controls. time you drove it. The individual settings are last the the since vehicle has used and settings another person with his/her own remote control even if settings set toyour personal own you find that will your BMW always means This stored for it are called up and carried out. isremote control detected andthe settings > > > specified pages. onthe are provided settings onthe Details ing, refer topage > PDC Park Distance Control page to refer mode, Drivelogic driving program inthe Sequential page Individual settings for MDrive, refer to > > > > Lighting settings: > > > > Displays ControlDisplay: on > refer to page Programming button on steering wheel, page locking oftheAutomatic vehicle, to refer when unlocking vehicle, refer topage Behavior of the central locking system High-beam assistant page Daytime running lamps Welcome lamps, refer to page to refer lamps, Welcome Pathway lighting, refer to page to lighting, refer Pathway page refer Triple turnto signal activation, 12h/24h clock format, refer refer to page format, clock 12h/24h Date format, refer topage refer Date format, page Language on Control Display, refer to to page Co the of Brightness refer to page to refer distances, temperature, and pressure, Measuring units for consumption, route/ 50 32 93 63 77 76 50 76 79 61 ntrol Display, refer * , refer to page * * , refer to , refer to : optical warn- 76 92 93 30 75 94 > > > > unlocking: during recalled are settings selected In addition, the following, most recently > > > > > > Operating from outside > > > releases the locks on the following: and engages simultaneously system The tion whenever the driver's door is closed. The central locking system is ready for opera- concept The Central locking system > > > Radio: refer topage settings, andtone sources: Audio volume and steering wheel mirrors, outside seat, ofdriver's Positions page buttons: selecting functions, refer stored to Programmable memory/direct selection destination guidance, refer topage text starting on text starting page perature in the upper body region, refer to air distribution, temperature, air tem- mode, matic recirculated air control/recirculated auto- and intensity, and function, cooling Automatic climate control: program AUTO topage refer display, of ness Navigation system Navigation pages to refer setting, volume Phone: with comfort access thevia lock door thevia control remote Fuel filler door Luggage compartment lid Doors Head-Up Display on/off Switching RDS Radio Data System page to refer stations, ofstored Display 21 180 152 * , refer topage , refer , 186 149 * : selection and bright- and selection : * * : voice instructions for for instructions voice : * , refer topage , refer 98 via the door handles 29 155 89 43 122

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for in use. currently control remote the for stored is setting You can set howthe vehicle is unlocked. The welcomedoors thelampsare and switched on. alarm system alarm alarm system alarm You canfind more detailed information onthe time. courtesy lamps the the and interior lamps lamps, welcome the In dles. addition, the it control remote is used, unlocked using the buttons lock or han- door operated. It prevents the doors from being is also the anti-theft system time, the same At then be opened from the outside. when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can control the remote along take Always inside. the rior lamps come on. addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte- centrallocking unlocks system automatically. In In event ofasufficientlythe severe accident, the rs h button. lamps the interior lamps, courtesy The the Press Unlocking control remote Using Opening and closing: page buttonforVia the central locking, refer to Operating from inside troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press 32 parked vehicle can lock thedoors from in a left unattended animals or Persons . The fuel filler door is not locked. 30

on page is armed/disarmed at thesame * are switched on or off. The off.The or on are switched inciple refer topage 35 . < * of the 16 . rs h button. the Press Locking and windows The button. sunroof glass the and hold the Press opening Comfort 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. Press the controller. > > Select amenuitem: troller. Select "Unlock button" and press thecon- troller. Select"Central locking"press and the con- press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe persons are inside, as unlocking from from asunlocking the are inside, persons if lock vehicle outside the not the Do from entire vehicle. Pressing button the the unlocks twice button unlocksonce the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Pressing the "Driver's door only" entire vehicle. button unlocksonce the Pressing the doors" "All * open. Panic mode* Panic button. vehicle in parking garages etc. can thisYou use also function your tolocate the Press With vehicle locked: lamps interior on Switching edge. inside is not possible without special knowl- 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. signals. confirmation the deactivate or activate can You Confirmation signals closing. after again locked also is lid compartment luggage locked previously A bay. cargo remote control the the in never lay To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, opening. that adequate clearance is available before unlocked. or locked previously was it whether of less second. The luggage compartmentlid opens, regard- approx. buttonfor 1 the Press Opening luggage compartment lid Switching offalarm: press anybutton. seconds. atleast buttonfor 3 the Press ger: ofdan- in case system cantrigger alarm You the troller. con- the press and "Confirmation" Select press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open < ment lid pivots back and up.Makesure During opening, the luggage compart- < refer to page drive;extended this will the recharge battery, discharged. Use this remote control during an the using remote control, the isthen battery If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle using a key. unlock and lockthe vehicle via the door lock to operate due to interference of this kind, local radio waves. Should the remote control fail The remote control may malfunction due to Malfunction > > conditions: two following the to subject is Operation Rules. This device withcomplies part ofthe 15 FCC Compliance statement: LX8CAS2 LX8CAS LX8766E LX8766S FCC ID: erned by the following: gov- is Operation regulations. Commission part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication transmitter andreceiverThe comply withunits For US ownersonly 8. 7. cause undesired operation. may that interference including received, this device must accept any interference and ference, harmfuldevice cause inter-This not must Press the controller. Select the desired signal. The is signal activated. 28 . 31

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing key stops the operation. stops key locking. or unlocking andhold the Turn in the key for positions lock. door user's authority to operate this equipment. edge. inside is not possible without special knowl- Usinglock door door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door. akey all turn right the tothe way leftor in the can you malfunction, electrical an of event the In Manual operation and thedows glass sunroof win- the the have ofoperating also option You operation Convenient 2. 1. When unlocking ment lid. remaining doors andthe luggage compart- Turning time the unlocks asecond thekey door and the fuel filler door. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's < sure thatnoone sure is injured. Releasing the Watch during the process tobeclosing changes tothese devices could voidthe or modifications unauthorized Any persons are inside, as unlocking from from asunlocking the are inside, persons if lock vehicle outside the not the Do from 32 < * from the driver'sfrom the < iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Automatic locking unlocked. remains The door filler fuel system. anti-theft the notactivate lid, butdoes partment unlocks orlocks the doors and luggage com- closed, button this the are doors front When inside Opening and closing: from 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. > Select amenuitem: troller. Select"Central locking"press and the con- press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press opened. been nodoor if time after ashort has The central locking system locks again if door notopened" "Relock inciple refer topage 16 . rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 8. then be opened from the outside. leaving the that thewhen vehicle so vehicle can control remote the along take inside.the Always > > Unlocking and opening result. automatically. The closing process will then be carried out the push themTo close doors, gently.merely Automatic softclosing* Doors > > Locking Press the controller. > time opens it. time opens the time unlocksfirst the the door, second pull onthe handle door ofeach twice: door or then pull the door handle above the armrest button for centralthe locking and system Either unlock the together with thedoors the lock button. lock the open driver's door cannot belocked using prevent youfrom being locked out, the To the down button press lock of a door. the doors simultaneously, or Use the central locking button to lock all of parkedthe vehiclecan doors lock from a in unattended left animals or Persons doors is clear; otherwise injuries may that the sure Make closing pathofthe < vehicle as soon as you start todrive. start asyou assoon vehicle The central locking system locks the driving" after "Lock The setting is selected. is setting The < partment lid opens. Opening from outside button Press from inside Opening clearance is available before opening. adequate that sure Make up. and back pivots During opening, the luggage lidcompartment Luggage compartment lid opens. the 1 luggagecompartmentlid second: approx. remote control onthe button for lid or the the Press luggage compartment button the on 1 or button or 2 * 33 : the luggage com- <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing down. luggage compartment lid makeit easier to pull onthe handleThe recesses interior trim ofthe wise injuries may result. Closing ally. can unlockthe luggage lidcompartment manu- you occur, should malfunction electrical an If Manual release lid is compartment unlocked. Pull the lever in thecargo bay. Theluggage release Emergency luggage compartment lid is clear, other- the of path closing the that sure Make 34 < 2. 1. Reinstalling rear seat: 2. 1. mounts until the front it at engages. mounts audibly theinto downward seat rear the Press is notensured. safety equipment so. doingbackrest when the bench and buckle pletely under the backrest. The center belt seat bench and slide the seat bench com- outer two beltthe buckles thePosition rear seat thein vehicle. Guide occur. is unlocked and opens. Pull lid the ring. luggage compartment The rear seat. remove from the mounts seat rear the Grasp otherwise correct operation of this the nottwist Do center belt buckle, ring,the otherwise injuriescan Only grasp the emergency release by < 4 bemust guided between the seat 1 at the front edge and front atthe edge 2 3 . Take out the the out . Take through the < > is locked and monitored again. monitored is locked and When the luggage compartment lid is closed, it > > > system: alarm the Unauthorized operations are brieflysignaled by > > > > The vehicle alarm system responds: concept The Alarm system > Switchingalarm off control,ton onthe refer but-remote to page opened with the system armed with the The luggage compartmentlid canalso be system is armed or disarmed theat same time. alarm the lock, door the at or control remote the lockorWhen you unlock the vehicle, either with Arming and disarming alarm system by flashing the high beams ignition lock. ignition Insert the controlremote all the into theway by switching on switching by alarm anacoustic with voltage To interruptions in battery vehicle or the wheels tow the to steal attempts someone if tilt vehicle's the in changes To refer to page sensor, motion To movements in the vehicle: interior partment lid are opened door,When a the hood,or the luggagecom- refer to page theUnlock vehicle using the control,remote 30

. the hazard warning flashers 35 33 . must be completely closed. > > > > displays lamp Indicator tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof andglass properly, thetion windows func- to sensor motion interior the for In order Interiorsensor motion theft towing.wheel or inofanattempted e.g. case reacts, system tiltThe of vehiclethe is monitored. The alarm Tilt alarm sensor disturbed while youwere away. approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle been has of maximum a for however lock, ignition until into thecontrol the remote inserted is The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking you were away. your vehicle notbeenhas disturbed while outafter indicator unlocking:The goes lamp notactivated. is sensor the motion interior However, seconds. 10 lamp flashes continuously after approx. itor the remaining areas, and the indicator the alerted area, the system beginsmon- to properlynot closed.Evenclose if not you do lid are hoodor doors, luggage compartment The indicator lamp flashes after locking: tem is armed. view mirror flashes continuously: thesys- The indicator lamp under the interior rear- 35 *

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing > > > situations: following the in e.g. alarms, unintentional vents may be switched off at the same time. This pre- sensor motion interior and sensor tilt alarm The Avoiding unintentional alarms > > Functional requirement > > > > tions: func- following the supports access Comfort interior. the control in remote the vicinityimmediate in or associated the detects automatically vehicle The pocket. jacket your in e.g. you, with control hand. your It is sufficient tocarry the remote control in remote the hold havingwithout to cle Comfort access allows youtoaccess your vehi- Comfort access* quently locked again. the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse- are offuntilswitched interior sensor the motion flashes continuously. Thetilt alarm sensor and control remote buttononthe The indicator lamp lights upbriefly and then the locked. is vehicle soonas as again the Press interior motion sensor Switching offtiltalarm sensor and When animals are to remain in vehicle in arethe toremain animals When onatrailer or sea by transporting oncar-carryingWhen trains, garages two-level In possible until after approx. 2 2 seconds. possible until after approx. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not side the vehicle. remote controlthe are you carrying is out- onlycan belockedif thevehicledetectsthat The vehicleorthe luggage compartment lid Starting engine rately Opening luggage compartmentlid sepa- closing Comfort Unlocking/locking vehicle 36 opening or closing if necessary. control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat roof, the system is checking whether a remote following. the in described are access The special features when using comfort beforehand. on opening and closing beginning onpage information the with yourself familiarize please the buttons on the remote control. Therefore, or with ously pressing the by access comfort You cancontrol the func control Comparison with ordinary remote > > Locking refer fully, handle toarrow adoor Grasp Unlocking hscrepnst rsigte but- ton. corresponds to pressing the This do nottouchthe surfaces, arrow on o hscrepnst rsigte button. the pressing corresponds to so. This doing > lighted surface, arrow On remaining the touchdoors, high- the thedoorhandle.but donotgrasp second, 1 surface, arrow surface, On driver'sthe door, the touch highlighted grasp thedoor handle. second, butdonot 1 your forapprox. hand the vehicle. in is located control remote the that detects The engine can only bestarted if the vehicle or closing the windows or the glass sun- the closingor or windows the glass Should a short delay occur when opening 2 , with a finger for approx. approx. for finger a , with tions mentioned previ- 3 , with the of back < 2 or or 3 when 1 , but , but 28

process immediately. process the the handleclosing door stops hand from closed. tery. switched off before locking to save the bat- start immediately. start after it is switched off. switched is it after the within 10seconds engine restart approx. to possible only is it detected, is control remote no as long As Display. Control the on appears amessage addition, up. lights In lamp warning leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a If you remote control the take with when you The windows and the glass sunroof glass the and windows The so. doing while handle door the surface, arrow Hold a finger orthe backofyour handagainst Comfort closing tion lock, refer topage lock,tion refer of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni- tion if a remote control is located in the interior can You the engine or start ontheswitch igni- engine Starting topage refer radioon the readiness, pressing By the switch button, you Start/Stop Switchingradio on readiness sounds. signal a and flash flashers warning hazard The lid thecompartment lidis closed, will reopen. locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage button. corresponds topressing the lid. This button the luggagePress compartment the on separately Opening luggage compartment lid < sure that one no sure is injured. the Removing Watch during the closing process to be electronic systems/consumers are all ignition thatthe sure and make Please or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will When doing so, do depress not the brake trol has been accidentally left inside the the inside left accidentally been has trol If the vehicle con- thataremote detects < < 2 or or < 56 3 , but do not grasp the . * 56 are are . * selves. example, operate the windows and injure them- leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for along control you take the Always remote when your field of vision until they are shut. 4. 3. 2. 1. message will appear in the Control Display. controlIf the a remote is dead, battery ofthe Replacing battery touch thesurfaces, arrow and handle door the grasp simultaneously not do closing locking/comfort or unlocking When control remote insert the in ignition the lock. or with a key. theTo start engine this,following vehicle with control buttonsonthe the remote due to local radio waves. Then open or close the The comfort access function may malfunction Malfunction Windows may limit limit may function.the Press cover closed. upward. battery in withLay positivenew facing side cover. Remove trol, refer topage trol, refer con- remote from key integrated Remove closing the windows and keepthem in To prevent injuries, exercise care when tion point or to your BMW center. point toyourtion BMW or toarecycling used Return battery collec- < 28 . 2 37 or or 3 . Otherwise, you <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing access, refer topage access, informationcomfortFor closingcomfort with on Opening, closing protection system will be impaired. the windows, otherwise of the pinchmovement of in the range accessories any notinstall Do closing. continuewould window the and objects, thin as such ofobstructions, kinds certain detect might fail to system it, safety asthe closing and the window reopens slightly. closing closes, the is interrupted action window specific value a as If the closingforce exceeds a Pinch protection system opened. hasbeen ofthe doors front neither as aslong minute, approx. 1 off for switched control the removed or remote ignition with canstill the the You windows operate ignition off switching After refer topage control, the or lock door with remote atthe tion opera- convenient the using on information For in located the rear. Separate switches for the rear windows are by pulling the switch. You canclose the windows in the manner same > > ment. the switch again stops the opening move- The window opensautomatically. Pressing Press switch beyond resistance point: pressed. switch the keep you The window continues toopenas long as point: resistance to switch Press inspect the window's travel pathprior travel the window's to inspect Despite the pinch protection system, 30 38 or 32 37 . . < selves. example, operate the roof and injure them- leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for along take remote controlAlways the when you field untilyour ofvision it is closed. Safety switch 2. 1. follows:ceed as ice the on windowprevents closing, normal pro- example, for if, or outside from of danger In case system Closing without pinch protection the ignitionthe switched topage on,refer operation with for ready is sunroof glass The Glass sunroof*, electric injuries. closing could trolled ofthe lead windows to is activated. feature safety dren, for example. lightsLED Theup whenthis switches in the rear passenger area, bychil- closed the being or opened via from windows can the switch, you With the safety prevent rear tection system. window closesThe without the pinch pro- approx. 4seconds. within hold and again point resistance the beyond switch the Pull closing force exceeds certaina value. the if slightly opens window the and limited and hold. The pinch protection system is point resistance the beyond switch the Pull closingglassit thein sunroof keep and To prevent injuries, exercise care when dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon- chil- when switch safety the press Always < < 56 . access, topage refer access, For informationcomfort on closingwithcomfort refer to page control, lock remote door with the atthe or tion For information onusing the convenient opera- by hand. be closed can and open remains visor when you slide the switch forward. Thesliding In asimilarmanner, theglass sunroof closes > > closing Opening, aged. dam- be will mechanism the otherwise tion, slightly. opens visor ing The closed glass sunroof is raised and the slid- switch. the Press Raising stops the motion. the stops Briefly pressingautomatically. switch the The glass sunroofand the sliding visoropen resistance point. Briefly press the switch back beyond the in position. this hold asyou aslong the together for switch The glass sunroofand the sliding visoropen point. theSlide resistance switch tothe back < with the glass sunroof in its raised posi- raised its in sunroof glass the with the toclose sliding notuse visor force Do 30 or 32 37 . . tinue closing. very thin sunroof would andthe objects, con- detect certain ofobstructions, kinds as such might fail to system closing asthe it, safety glass sunroof reopens a short way. thetion, closing is action interrupted and the opening or when closing from the raised posi- closing roughly the from center ofthe roof when resistance encounters sunroof If the glass system protection Pinch motion. the stops switch the pressing Briefly > > automatic: are also following movements The point. Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance automatically closing and Opening this work doneby center.your BMW system initialized. recommendshaving BMW totherespond Then command. the raise have only may sunroof the loss, apower After power supply Following interruptionselectrical in system. The roof closes without the pinch protection point hold. and the resistance beyond forward In caseof danger from outside,slide the switch system Closing withoutprotection pinch is opened all the way. the all opened is sunroof the direction: opening the in switch When the sunroofis raised, briefly press the way. the all raised is sunroof thePress switch with the the open: sunroof inspect prior to path travel sunroof's the inspect system, protection pinch the Despite < 39

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing 1. move the glass sunroof manually. can you malfunction, electrical an of event the In manually* Moving 2. kit, refer to page to refer kit, tool onboard the ascrewdriver from using Fold the cover panel down, if necessary indicates the rotation the indicates direction closing. for in the desired direction. The arrow below sunroof glass the Move provided. opening kit, tool topage onboard refer Insert Allen wrenchthe supplied with the 40 214 . 214 , into the on airbags, refer to page to refer airbags, on information additional and locations airbag For porary. tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may be fully excluded, depending onthe circum- ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot inju- instructions, the all to adhere you if Even are triggered. if occur airbags can the injuries otherwise airbags, head or side on the rest not their head thatoccupantsdo sure Make triggered. airbags front are panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the and does notrest feet or legs on the instrument sitting is thatthe correctly passenger sure front area. Make astorage as side passenger front the ofthe airbag onthe notuse front Do cover and bags the seat occupant. No one nothingand is to come thebetween air- in the event of airbag deployment. risk the ofinjuries mize andarms hands to your tomini- positions, o'clock 9o'clockthe and3 rim with hands at hold the steering wheel by its dren safely, refer safely, topage dren ontransporting chil- information additional For lowing section. observe the instructions contained in the fol- to strongly urge you we optimal efficiency, with operate systems safety the that ensure animportant role in To accident. an plays the sitting airbags, restraints position the and interaction the belts, the head safety with tribution torelaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the ideal The avital positionsitting con- canmake Sitting safely Adjusting Airbags between yourself and yourself and airbags. between the Always Alwaysmaintain adequatedistance an 87 53 . . < Safety belts, refer topage reduction belt. in the safety ofthe restraint the in a toavoid order to readjust tension, pull the belt in the upper body area periodically that prevents fitting beltthe properly from and and injure wearing theabdomen. Avoid clothing the in area a frontal lap impact the hips in over body as possible. Otherwise thebelt canslip across the lap and shoulders, as close to the the twisting,belt Wear safety snuglywithout over solid or breakable objects or bepinched. the neck, rub against sharp edges, berouted across lie not must belt safety The abdomen. hips in the lap area and notdoes press on the lap. Makesure thatthebelt lies low aroundthe apassenger's in toride children or small infants are all equipped with a safety belt. Your vehicle is provided with five seats, which substitute. a represent do not but they device, safety tional complementbags the safety belt anaddi-as Air- occupied seats. being worn atall ofthe are Before every drive, make sure that safety belts belts Safety Head restraints, refer to page accident. increased danger of injury in the event of an risk spinal of injury accident.event an of in the reduces the restraint head correctly adjusted A Head restraints wear asingle safety belt.Never allow Never allow more than one person to is there Otherwise level. ear at approx. is Adjust headthe restraint sothatits center < 45 41 . 44 . <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting page 3 2 1 page please observe the adjustment instructions on safety belts provided onpage Please follow the instructions on todamage the belt. vided by belt, eliminatingprotection the normally pro- event of an accident of sliding under the safety being driven, otherwise theredangerisinthe a tothe the too far rear while vehicle backrest is onthe side, passenger Also do not incline the accident. ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an respond with unexpected movement, and the mation on the active front active onthe front restraintsmation head Note before adjusting Seats Adjusting seat Angle Height direction Longitudinal 44 41 tinue to provide optimized protection, tinue optimized toprovide con- systems the that safety To ensure the vehicle is moving. Theseat could toadjustyourwhile seat attempt Never . . < 42 < 46 and the infor- the and

on cles. and helps relieve stress on the shoulder mus- position driving relaxed a provides This area, This also supports the back in the shoulder Shoulder support* 9 8 > > relaxed, upright sitting position. plementary support to help you maintain a The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- region. in additional support to the obtain lumbar backrest the of contour adjust the also can You Lumbar support* 7 6 5 4 Lumbar support Lumbar Thigh support lowers section of switch. Shift curvature upor down: press upper or section of rear switch. or Increaseor decrease curvature: press front Shoulder support height restraint Head Backrest Backrest width * * wheel, refer to MDrive on page buttononthe steering with seat the driver's the for active width ofthe adjustment backrest can You activatealso your preferred program press longer.button To deactivate: LED in buttonlights the up. The Display. Control the on shown is program button until the Press repeatedly desired the of curves. succession aquick through driving when sides gram provides increased lateral support onboth pro- The tosport. "Sport" comfort from grams program. You canselect fromamong three pro- depending onthe vary the adjustment of speed ofthe width adaptation andthe The backrest situation. driving rent eral is support to adapted automatically cur-the width backrest lat- set, onthe the Based above. see width, backrest comfortable a set First Adjusting active backrest width* temporarily opens all the way. the all opens temporarily and entry To facilitate backrest the widthexit, Easy entry/exit* 50 . stored in the memory. ofthe is not support adjustment lumbar The exterior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel. the seat or steering wheel. risk accidentunexpected of fromof movement 4. 3. 2. 1. Storing seat passenger and seat driver's the for tions can You posi- and request different store two wheel memory and mirror steering Seat, 2. 1. Comfort mode Requesting ment switches or one of the memory ofthebuttons. one memory or switches ment when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- The system cancels the adjustment procedure Press the desired memory the button Press memory desired button: The in button the LED lights up. the Press steering wheel positions. mirror and exterior seat, theSet desired to page Switch onradio or readiness refer ignition, Briefly press the desired memory button the press Briefly memory desired switch on radio readiness. or unlocking after door driver's the Open The LED goes out. or ory while the vehicleis moving. There is a the mem- from notrequest aposition Do 2 . 56 . < 43 1 or 2 : 1 * ,

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for buttons. or ofthe switches one memory ment when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- The system cancels the adjustment procedure movement of the seat. a rearward of result as a seat the behind objects couldso injury cause to topersons damage or seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do Requesting with remote control 2. 1. Safety feature > > chooseYou can whenthe position is requested: stored for the remote control currently in use. rior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are The last positions of the driver's seat, the exte- If the button was pressed inadvertently: inadvertently: pressed buttonwas goes buttonagain; out. press the LED the If the press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. Press the controller to open the Open the start menu. Press the desired button the Press memory onortion off. Close the driver's door and switch the igni- Request when opening driver's door Requestunlocking when vehicle process been has completed. untiland maintain pressure adjustment the sure thatthesure footwell behind the driver's When using this feature, always make 44 inciple refer topage < 1 or 2 16

. collision. reducing potential in the event of a rear-end injury- ofits advantage totake is it not possible function and protective its perform will restraint wise, there is assuranc no functioning ofthe head active Other- restraint. tothedistance head. active the head the severity, reduces restraint In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient Active front head restraints cannot provide its protective function. restraint head the asotherwise passengers, thestall restraints before transporting head willone sitting be on the in seat question. Rein- no if restraints head the remove Only accident. increased danger of injury in the event of an risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident. reduces the restraint head correctly adjusted A Head restraints Select "Deactivated" and press the controller. request: cancel theTo 9. 8. 7. 6. Press the controller. opened". Select "After unlocking" or"After door troller. con- and the pos." press seat "Last Select troller. Select"Central locking"press and the con- covers that could impede the proper Do not use seat covers or head restraint is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is center so that its head the restraint Adjust e thatthe active head < shoulder support, refer topage back distance tothe the withof head thethe On seats with a shoulder support restraint. head the of function properthe impair and installed. and not function properly. equipment sonnel. Otherwise, this safety will procedures with correspondingly trained per- workshop that works according to BMWrepair this work carried center or aBMW by out a are triggered in a rear-end collision. Only have the Have active restraints reset theyhead after > > headback ofthe Front adjustingseats: distance to the height adjustment Front seats: rest cushion toward the rear. pushtheBack: buttonandslide the head- Forward: pull up. headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can behind the notplace objects Do any to have the front head restraints removed restraints removed head front the to have Please contact a BMWcenter if you wish < < < 42 * . you adjust adjust you substitute. a represent do not but they device, safety tional complementbags the safety belt anaddi-as Air- occupied seats. being worn atall ofthe are Before every drive, make sure that safety belts page on instructions adjustment the observe please Rear seats: height adjustmentRear seats:height the resting position. restraint forward for increased lateral support in You can fold the side extensions onthehead Adjusting sideextensions* Safety belts 2. 1. Removing > > push the push the restrainthead downward. Press thePress button,arrow Pull tothe the upward restraint head stop. the press To lower: button,arrow To raise: pull up. restraint all the allrestraint the out. way 41 tinue to provide optimized protection, tinue optimized toprovide protection, con- systems safety the that ensure To . < 45 1 ,

and pull the head head the pull and 1 ,

and and

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting seat. objects if vated placed onthe are passenger acti-be km/h.It canalso5 mph/8 approx. above safetyThe belt reminderis operative at speeds positioned. is correctly belt safety the whether left and right. Thebelt buckle embossed with sitting onthe for passengers are seat rear the into integrated buckles belt safety rear two The the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page adjusted, correctly is seat the forcorrect adultbuild every seat occupants of if The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be 3. 2. 1. Releasing and passenger seat* Safety beltreminder fordriver's seat the belt buckle. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in Fastening Guide the belt into its reel. red the buttoninPress the buckle. Grasp thebelt firmly. the Control Display. Please check check Please Display. Control the nal sounds.message A also appears on sig- a and up lights lamp indicator The 46 42 . guaranteed. ofthisrect is not operation equipment safety respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise cor- according toBMW repair procedures with cor- works that center ataworkshop or at a BMW out carried work this have Only checked. points anchor belt the have and systems restraint child belts, belt safety any the the tensioners, and tons mayvarytons depending onthe equipment. appearance arrangementbut-The and the of Front heating Seat beltsDamage tosafety 3 2 1 the Controlthe Display with buttons ture level.The temperature levelshown on is respective per the button once tempera- Press use bypassengers riding inthe center position. the word is CENTER intended exclusively for Seat heating with active seat ventilation seat active with heating Seat LED heating, one Seat LEDs heating, three Seat dent or in the event damage,of replace subjected to strain dueWhen toan acci- < 2 and 3 . * 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage backrest. the and cushion seat the The heat output can bedistributed variously in active seatventilation Temperature distribution without press button To switch off: longer. lit. remain LEDs ontheload The battery. heating is switched off in order to reduce the The temperature is reduced and if need be, the are lit. LEDs three maximum temperature is supplied when The iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage backrest. the and cushion seat the The heat output can bedistributed variously in seat ventilation active with distribution Temperature select "Driver" or "Passenger". the Move controller left rightto the or to the controller. Select "Seat heater distribution" and press mate". the Move controller "Cli- leftto the toopen menu. start the Open The The issetting applied. tion. Turn controller the toadjustthe distribu- mate". the Move controller "Cli- leftto the toopen menu. start the Open 16 16 . . Rear 2 1 equipment. depending the on vary may tons but- ofthe arrangement and appearance The Active seat ventilation* tion. perature levels, without temperature distribu- tem- heating; two tofront seat similar Operation The settingThe is applied. Turn controllerthe toadjustthe distribution. 3. Active seat ventilation with seat heating Active ventilation seat ger's seat climate" and press the controller. the press and climate" seat ger's "Passen- or climate" seat "Driver's Select 47

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting up. longer. button off:press To switch onthe The lit. remain load battery. LEDs ventilation is switched off inorder to reduce the The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the when three LEDs are lit. Control Display. The maximum level is supplied the on appears level ventilation The level. tion respective per the button once ventila- Press 3 2 1 dent risk. mirrors, otherwise there is an increased acci- the see in you onwhat based traffic following the of appear. distance notestimate Do they in reflected are the than closer mirror Objects glass. their mirror of edges the outer against pressing mirrors by the manually also adjust can You Adjusting manually ror and steering wheel memory on page mir- toSeat, refer mirror positions, Storing the Exterior mirrors Mirrors < Folding mirrors in and out and in mirrors Folding curbautomatic monitor totheSwitching other or mirror to the Adjusting e.g. when the vehicle has become heated cooling, rapid for used is level highest The more curved than the driver's mirror. The mirror on the passenger's side is < 48 * 43 . 2. Activating mirror – automatic curb monitor Tilting down passenger-side exterior engine is running or the ignition is switched on. exterior mirrors are heated whenever the both a Below certain temperature, outdoor Automatic heating button Pressing Folding mirrorsin and out* position, arrow Slide switch into the passenger side mirror Deactivating 1. prx 5mh4 km/h. mph/40 25 approx. are folded out automatically at a speed of into back in folded in folded were that Mirrors position. correct the manually been have that rors car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mir- in for example, This km/h. advantageous, is 30 mph/ 20 ofapprox. toaspeed and up out in the width the ofthe system. wash car erwise they could be damaged, depending on ing, etc. to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park- driver to see the area immediately adjacent the allows This side. passenger's the on The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat R. position Shift into reverse or move selector lever into position, arrow Slide switch into the driver's side mirror mirrors in manually, in withor button manually, mirrors the fold wash, a car through going Before 2 3 . allows you tofoldmirrors 1 . < 3 , oth- Interior rearview mirror in either.in ofthe front mirror, not attachstickers ofany kind to the windshield interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do clean and do not cover the area between the For trouble-free operation, keepthe photocells mirror housing. the of rear the on position offset an at located the other the mirror, is of while glass the into mirror. integrated is interior One the rearview in photocells two by controlled is feature This dimming feature* automatic Interiorexterior and mirrors, cles at turnnight, the knob. vehi- effect of following the dazzle To reduce mirror and steering wheel memory on page Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat, directions. The steering wheel can beadjusted in four theas resultdent unexpected movement. of Adjusting Steering wheel the LED in button LED the the up.lights operating, is heater wheel steering the When the Press button. wheel heating* Steering position. the uppermost into moves temporarily To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel Easy entry/exit* vehicle ismoving.There is arisk ofacci- Do not adjust the steering wheel while the 49 43 < .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting wheel Programmableon button steering 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- canprogramYou buttonindividually. the 4. 3. rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press the controller. Select "Steering wheel button" andpress controller. the press and "Settings" Select 50 inciple refer topage 16 . 5. iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Display. Control the on MDrive theWith onyou switched ignition canset Configuring settings steering wheel. them activate and play ual settings for your vehicle onthe Control Dis- MDriveWith you canconfigure several individ- MDrive > > for button: the instructions" If you have programmed "Navigation voice Press the button on the steering wheel. Operating function controller. Select the desired function the press and > > > > > Press the button. the Press To repeat the last voice instruction: Press buttonlonger. on/off: instructions voice To switch > A list of different functions appears: Changes audio source audio Changes source" entertainment "Next storednumbers phone Display/hide or phone list last book of "Telephone list" "Telephone Switches the Control Display on/off on/ off" "Monitor theMutes sources audio on/ off" "Mute control onpage recirculated-air Automatic AUC to refer offoutside air, shutting Permanently "Air recirculation on / off" system Voice instructionsthe fornavigation "Navigation voice instructions" * inciple refer topage with the button on the buttononthe with the 100 * 16 . 1. 3. 2. > > > > rs h button. the opens This start menu. the Press > > played: The functions contained in MDrive aredis- Select"MDrive" presscontroller. and the menu. Pressthe controller the open to page Views of the Head-Up Display, refer to Display" "Head-Up refer to page adjustment, Programs widthof active the backrest "Backrest" Control, refer to page to refer Control, EngineDynamic M the Programs of "POWER" M Dynamic Mode, topage Mode, refer Dynamic M and Control Stability Dynamic "DSC" Control, refer to page to refer Control, Damping Electronic the of Programs "EDC" logic driving programs, refer topage Drivelogic: shifting modes and Drive- Sequential Manual Transmission with "SMG Drivelogic" 89 * * 59 82 43 80 61 igtevhcesaiiy rs h button ling the vehicle stability. the Press Dynamic Stability Control is currently control- DSC or Antilock Brake System ABS the MDrive. deactivates Pressing buttonagain the active. MDrive are in contained buttononthe steering wheel. the Press Activating settings rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 7. 6. 5. 4. Press the controller. outsidemade MDrive. of the setting current retains "Unchanged" ting. Turn the controller the toselect set- desired Press the controller. Select the desired function. > default values: all forYou tothe settings MDrive can reset the button, MDrive was unable to react, as as toreact, unable was button,MDrive the after pressing flashes If the lamp indicator "Reset to default" to "Reset the the for Display Control functions the cluster lights up. settings The on made The indicator lamp in the instrument 51

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting ly rs h button twice. press theplay: MDrive Control for the on Dis- made settings in the buttons all Toreactivate center console. with e.g. the MDrive, outside settings individual with activated, Even MDrive can change you flashes. again when the indicator lamp nolonger < 52 be reduced. tems. Otherwise the degree of protection may sys- restraint child ofthe use and installation restraint system. the airbags are triggered, even with a child therean is increased risk injury of for the child if firstger deactivated. must Otherwise, side be seat, thefront and sideairbags on thepassen- doors. the themselves andother persons, e.g.byopening of the front passenger For more information on automatic deactivation The right place for children Transporting childrensafely systems Installing child restraint Exception for front passenger seat size andweight. system can no longer beuseddue their to age, restraint child suitable a as soon as belt safety Children 13 years of age or older must wear a increased danger of injury in an accident. height of the child. Otherwise there is an tems which correspond age,weight tothe and transported in be rear inthe child restraint sys- for children is on the rear seat. Accident research shows that the safest place Children alwaysrearthe in facturer's instructions for selection, manu- system restraint child the Observe front onthe passenger system restraint child a use to necessary be ever it Should vehicle, otherwise they could endanger notleaveDo children unattended in the with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may cm only ft/150 with a height under 5 years of age or Children younger than 13 < < < airbags, refer to page refer airbags, < 88 . 4. 3. 2. 1. ger seat. passen- front the on seat child's ofthe stability this limits Otherwise position. memory the any backrest width adjustment and donotcall up active deactivate the child's the seat, mounting Backrest width onfrontpassenger seat 3. 2. 1. Lockingbelt safety systems. restraint child tosecure out front passenger can be locked against pulling andthe belt the Allbelts safety for safety rear Child seatsecurity Install child's seat. child's Install ment, referment, topage width adjust- active backrest Deactivate ment, referment, topage theCompletely open backrest width adjust- position. memory the up tocalldoor theclose and seat passenger After unlocking vehicle, the sit front the on The safety belt is locked. pull the tautagainst child restraint system. Allow thebelt webbing tobe pulled in and Pull out beltthe webbing completely. belt. Secure the child with restraint the system front passenger seat all the way. After backrest the Open width ofthe setting < 43 42 . . 53

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Transporting children safely may beimpeded. the Otherwise, backrest. action the protective against snugly resting is system restraint child restraint fixing system. the from region belt ofthe the away child pull seat, child's LATCH the attaching Before their protectiveimpair function. in child order notto LATCH systems restraint dren. LowerLATCH: Anchor and Tethers for CHil- childLATCH restraint fixing system 3. 2. 1. Unlocking safetybelt the gap between the andthe the gapbetween backrest. the seat atthelocated by indicated positions in arrows are anchors the LATCH for anchor points The Rear seats pletely. Allow the belt webbing tobepulled in com- Remove the child restraint system. Open the belt buckle. properly clicked into place and that the the that and place into clicked properly have mounts thatthesure Make LATCH instructions on installation and use of Follow the system manufacturer's 54 < < point upwardpoint before using. theto Fold correspondingarrows. mounting with strap, atether refer child systems restraint three additionalThere are for points mounting aged. otherwise mounting the could points dam- be dent. child restraint system in the event of an acci- otherwise, the belt not may properly secure the not twist on its way to the upper point; mounting Child restraint system with tether strap child's seat. the before mounting cover Remove caps the located behind the indicated protective caps. are anchors the LATCH for anchor points The system* Rear withseats through-loading 2 1 Outer rearseat strapPlacement oftether Head restraints Head Direction of travel < < points to secure child restraint systems, systems, restraint child tosecure points the use tether-strap Only mounting is not routed over sharp edges and does does and edges sharp over routed not is Make that thesure upper retaining strap 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. the points. mounting using before covers remove or upward Fold 7 6 5 4 3 2. 1. Center rear seat 5. 4. 3. Pull the retaining strap taut. position. into the Slide restraint the head bottom point. mounting retaining hooktothe the strap Attach the restraint supports. head Thread theupper retaining strap between Slide the head restraint upward. tem Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys- Backrest Rear window shelf Mounting point ofupperHook retaining strap Guide retainingGuide through strap opening. the front. the Fold the center armrest somewhat toward Pull the retaining strap taut. point. mounting retaining hooktothe the strap Attach centerarmrest. the Fold back side airbags triggered. airbags are side panels. Otherwise injuries can becaused if the the door towards child's of seat lean the out only. the door opened from outside the be can now Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors: Child-safety locks forreardoors On trips riding in the rear of the vehicle. page to refer windows, power for the switch safety the press Always Safety switch for power windows airbags, makesure that children donot If the vehicle is equipped with rear side 38 , when children are are children when , < 55

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving switched on. The ignition is switched off if it was still device. it in as far as possible to release the locking Before removingthe remote control, first press damage may result. may damage lock Inserting remote control into ignition Ignition lock Driving lock ignition from control remote Removing page refer to cases, control into the ignition lock in exceptional remote access, only the insert comfort With Comfort access* operation. for ready are systems/consumers electronic Some on. switches readiness Radio ignitionthe lock. into control as as remote possible far Insert the ignition lock using force, as otherwise control notpull outoftheDo the remote 56 < 36 . save the battery. save not required when the engine is not running to or N, the engine starts. depressed and the selector lever in position P buttonwith Start/Stop thepress the brake you when Transmission: Manual Sequential pressing the button. Start/Stop the or ignition readiness radio off. and on the buttonswitches Start/Stop the Pressing Start/Stop button page are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to operation. The odometer and the trip odometer All electronic systems/consumers are ready for Ignition on > > Radio readiness is switched off: cluster. instrument the in displayed is selected puter com- the of information last The operation. for ready are systems/consumers electronic Some Radio readiness page refer on toLocking door handle, onthe face with comfort access ignitionthe lock when the remote control is removed from 66 electronicsystems/consumers which are ignition offthe switch andthe Please when you depress the brake pedal while engine the starts transmission: Manual . 36 < < * by touching thesur- the catalytic the converter. there is a danger of overheating and damaging fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the speed. Instead, begin todrive at a moderate engine running while the vehicle remains stationary. it leaving by up warm engine to the not allow Do brake, otherwise the vehicle can begin to roll. Nandfirmly apply hand- the intolever position ning, shift into neutral into shift ning, Before leaving vehicle the with the engine run- hazard. potential safety engine running, suchas a vehicle represents a Never leave an unattended vehicle with the an odorless andcolorless, buthighly toxic gas. The exhaust gases cont gases can cause unconsciousness and death. 3. 2. 1. Starting engine cluster goout. ment instru- the in lamps warning and indicator All off switched Radio readiness and ignition access in vehicle,access in refer page to incontrol ignitionRemote or lock with comfort Manual transmission* Press the the Press button. Start/Stop position. idling theDepress clutch pedal into andshift Depress brake pedal. sion or repeated starting attempts in starting attempts repeated or sion Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- otherwise the the otherwise inhalation exhaust oftoxic Do notrun theengine in closed rooms, * < or move the the move selector or ain carbon monoxide, ain carbon 36 . < otherwise the vehicle could roll. When parking, firmly a tem design. tem sys- the to due undertone metallic slightly a has When the engine is cold, the exhaust system offwith the start cannot open. You hood N. selector lever. Then select position totherefer cluster display instrument the or Switching off engine 4. 3. 2. 1. vehicle,access in refer page to control ignitionRemote in or lock with comfort Drivelogic Transmission Manual Sequential with 4. 3. 2. 1. Drivelogic Transmission Manual Sequential with 4. 3. 2. 1. Manual transmission* Press the the Press button. Start/Stop N. position in lever selector Place Depress brake pedal. Firmly applythe handbrake. tion lock, refer to page to refer lock, tion Remove the remote control from the igni- cally and acoustically. engine, this will opti- pointed outtoyou be If N is engaged when switching off the the Press button. Start/Stop Shift adriving into position. Firmly applythe handbrake. page to refer lock, tion Remove the remote control from the igni- Firmly applythe handbrake. Shift first into gear reverse. or stopped. thePress buttonwith Start/Stop the vehicle remote controlyou. with When leaving the vehicle, always take the the last selector lever position selected, If the back shift does notstart, engine to < pply the handbrake, as pply the 57 56 56 . . 36 < .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving brake is applied. The brake lamps do not light upwhenthe hand- ifto a trafficstop the conditions are suitable. brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming Indicator lamp wheels. rear the brakes it parked; while rolling from vehicle the The handbrakeprimarily is intendedprevent to Handbrake swerve. rear oftherear and causewheels the to car applicationan ofthehandbrake can lock upthe ton of handbrake the lever. Otherwise, too firm In press the continuously firmly. but- doing so, thewhile vehicle is in donotpull motion, it too lever. the lower and button the press upwards, slightly Pull Releasing lever automatically. in The locks position Applying ing action,ing occasionally apply hand- the preventTo corrosionand one-sided brak- make make it necessary toapply thehandbrake If exceptional circumstances should < Indicator lamp for Canadian models. handbrake is applied. starting off.The when sounds also nal sig- a and up, lights lamp indicator The 58 < to lights,to Shift page briefly before reaching the maximum rpm. Refer reason for concern. for reason no operation and partslight This jolt. ofnormal gear, you may feel a When shifting into 1st gear could result in engine damage. 4th or 3rd the into accidental shifting otherwise Reverse gear Reverse transmission*Manual Display driving sporty shiftstyle, lights thein Head-Up vehiclebest achieve theacceleration To with a Shift lights overcome some resistance. tothe pressing gearshift lever the left, When Select only when the vehicle is stationary. press the gearshift lever toward the right,gearshift the the toward lever press While shifting in the 5th/6th gear lane, * indicate optimum shifting the point 62 . < minimal and the engine outputis reduced. fuelsnow. In the the consumption process, is for example, ideal for city driving or driving on pedal. accelerator ofthe This is, to movements 400"In the program "P the engine reactsgently "P 400" program you. to available are programs accelerator pedal movements is to be. Three ence how thesporty reaction of your vehicle to Engine Dynamic With M Control Engine Dynamic M "P 400" and "P 500". repeatedly switches between the programs button POWER the Pressing program. 500" "P buttontoactivate the POWER the Press is program activated. is engine "P 400" time the the started, Each Drivelogic Transmission Manual Sequential with Selecting program accelerator pedal movements. ingly sporty with maximum performance to uncompromis- and spontaneously especially In the "P500 the Sport" engine program reacts "P 500 Sport" program engine the to accelerator pedal movements. of reaction andmore spontaneous formance The "P 500" program provides maximum per- "P 500" program Control you can influ- can you Control The concept The Drivelogic Transmission with Sequential Manual ing wheel, refer toMDrive on page and "P500 Sport" with 500" "P 400", "P programs the select can You is program activated. is engine 400" time the the started, Each "P Manual transmission > > > It offers functions: the following you dles on the steering wheel. with the ated shift andtwo selector lever pad- The Sequential Manual Transmission is oper- thehandles changes. clutching gear and system electrohydraulic an which in mission manual with is Drivelogic trans- an automated The SMGSequential Manual Transmission > > the LED in the POWER buttonlights up. in POWER LED the the For the programs "P 500" and "P 500 Sport" MDrive. activate "P the Please to MDrive onpage buttononthe steering refer wheel, with the can You activatealso your preferred program Upshift display, shift lights, refer to page refer lights, shift display, Upshift Drivelogic, topage refer programs, Selection option between different driving mode DriveSequential or mode operation: automatic manual or Optional Automatic double clutching tion incorrect shifting even in Sequential opera- downshifting andprevention Automatic of 50 . 500 Sport" program with program Sport" 500 the button on the steer- on the button the 59 50 . 61 62

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving Selector leverpositions then shift shift drive.then into and position, N the into lever selector the shift closing after the or door hood,firstdriver's the paddles orthe selector lever. beginTo driving pedals,operate shift not runningengine anddo into shift tomanually idlingnecessary mode. clutches and then declutches again, i.e. it is not automatically Transmission Manual tial shifting on a slippery road surface, the Sequen- If the driving situation requires, e.g. when down- startingengine. before select Always N Idle Select only when the vehicle is stationary. R Reverse the brake is applied. will shift unless notbe the executed command N; Press thebrake pedalbefore shifting outof Shiftlock > > > > > > Β N: Neutral R: Reverse gear : Drive position: : Drive the driver'sthe the or door with hood the The system shifts into Nwhen you open Sequential mode D/S: switch between Drive mode and downshifting –: manual +: manualupshifting 60 < > > > you: for thinks Transmission ual In the the situations, Man- following Sequential inface second gear,e.g. in ice.case of Starting off is also possible on a level road sur- is Sequential mode activated. position islever pushed right tothe the into drive After every engine start, as soon as the selector remove your foot from the accelerator to do so. or lever. dles selector the donotneed to You You can shift up and downusing theshift pad- S Sequentialmode eration. down as it will go. You achieve maximum accel- presspassing, the accelerator pedal as far Kick-down: when for rapid acceleration, e.g. again. press selector tothe lever D/S right toward or lever selector the or paddles shift the using To backintoswitch Sequential the shift mode: press selector tothe lever D/S. right toward Shifting Sequential mode: toDrive from mode automatically. are shifted gears all forward mode, the Drive In D Drive mode your intervention. your without even automatically downshifts sion dependent minimum speed, the transmis- Shortly before dropping below a gear- gear. into first downshifts automatically mission When the vehicle is stationary, the trans- system. the engine to overrev will not beexecuted by example, a downshift that would cause the for speed; thus, ofengine tion vehicle and aplausible combina- in will they result when Upshifts and downshifts are executed only Β and the brake pedal is pressed, the shifts into N. shift paddles, or selector lever, then the system If you do not subsequently operate the pedals, 3 Displaysinstrument in cluster > > shift paddles steeringwheel Using on > > Using selector lever changes Gear 2 1 followed by a D is displayed In drive mode, the currently selected gear ade–. paddle To downshift, briefly pull the left shift +. paddle To upshift, briefly pull right the shift ward. for- lever the push selector To downshift, To upshift, pull the selector lever back. refer to Drivelogic on page matches the number of illuminated fields, program, driving Selected Gear 1 to 7, R, N engaged the driver'swith door therunning. engine The gear display flashes when you open < 61 wthsfo rga oporm5 6 toprogram from program switches to page Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, refer DSC the when available only is 6 Program 3 is activated. program engine time isEach the driving started, 6. to 1 sporty/purist ing from balanced/dynamic You can choose from six driving programs rang- mode Sequential In 5. sporty/highly to 1 dynamic relaxed ing from There are five different driving programs, rang- mode Drive In driving program 3 is active. mode, Drive the to Sequential the from change is Exception: program the active. after first mode and the Drive mode, the respective last Sequential the between change you time Each available toyou. DrivelogicWith driving various are programs Drivelogic cluster,refer page. to driving program is displayed in the instrument the Press untilbutton repeatedly desired the in center console Selecting driving programwithbutton vate DSCwhenever possible. To maintain vehicle stability, always acti- 80 . If DSC is activated, then the system . If is then system the DSC activated, 61 61 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving 2. 1. the maximum rpm. shifting point reachingoptimum briefly before 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for Display. Control the on MDrive the onyou With ignitionswitched can set 8. 7. 6. 5. refer to MDrive on page buttononthe steering wheel, with the gram You canalso activate your preferred driving pro- wheel steering on Selecting driving programvia button shift lights in the Head-Up Display Head-Up the in lights shift sporty driving style in the Sequential mode, vehiclebest achieve theacceleration To with a Shift lights play, refer toSelecting displayspage on Select display "MView" on Head-Up Dis- page DisplayUp on Switch on Head-Up Display, refer to Head- troller. The first setting firsttroller. The setting selected. is Select "SMGDrivelogic" and press the con- Select "MDrive" and press the controller. menu. Press the controller to open the Open the start menu. Press the controller. Turn controller set to drivingprogram. programs. driving select to controller Press ofMDrive. outside made settings current the retains "Unchanged" Sequential mode. Turn controller setor to Drivemode 62 inciple refer topage 89 50 . . * indicate the indicate the 16 89 . . resistance point. resistance press offmanually, theTo totheturn lever lever point. the the beyond Press resistance Using turnsignals 3 2 1 flasher headlamp Turn signals/ 4. 3. avoid engine speeds in this range. is supply engine. cut offtoprotect the Always When the maximum rpm is exceeded, the fuel reached, the beginsentire toflash. tachometer When the permissible maximum rpmis Turn signals flasher Headlamp High beams field lights up lights field redShift the the when indicator latest at point.upshift consecutively indicate theapproaching fields illuminated low When approaching the maximum rpm, yel- the tachometer. The current engine speed is highlighted on 2 . 1 of the tachometer ofthe tachometer needs to be replaced. rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 6. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage can deactivate this You or activate function. times. three flashes signal point; turn the resistance the to lever the Press Triple turn signal activation long as youwish tosignal. foras hold and point toresistance lever Press Signaling briefly press the controller. and isselected "Lighting" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press controller. "TripleSelectsignal" press the and turn lamp indicates thataturn indicates signal bulb lamp Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator Triple turn signaling is activated. < 16 . tion when released. The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- arrow upward, lever the Pull wipers on Switching 5 4 3 2 1 Wiper system of the interior rearview mirror. rearview interior the of front in directly windshield, the on located is sor afunction oftheas rain sen- The intensity. rain operationThe wiper is controlled automatically Rain sensor vehicle isstationary. The system reverts to normal speed when the point. Press twice or press beyond the resistance Fast wiperspeed the mode tent vehicle when is stationary. The system reverts to operation in the intermit- Press once. Normal wiperspeed Adjusting rain sensor Cleaning windshield andheadlamps Activating/deactivating rain sensor wipebriefSwitching wipers or off Switching wipers on

sensitivity level 63 1 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving Activating rain sensor you will damage the washer pump. the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise fluid. Donotuse washing mechanisms when referWasher to fluid antifreeze, awasher use vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing, your If you so, do onthe windshield. freeze appropriate intervals. at washed simultaneously are headlamps When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the period. brief a for wipers the activates and windshield the against fluid washer sprays system The Pull the lever, arrow Cleaning windshield and headlamps activation. wiper ired do so could result in damage caused by undes- out. arrow the buttonagain, Press Deactivating rain sensor Turn the knurled wheel Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level button,arrow the Press ton lights up. lights ton there danger is any thatthe fluid will if the mechanisms not use Do washing Failure wash. to car anautomatic through passing when rain sensor the Deactivate 64 4 < . 5 3 . . TheLED in the but- 3 . TheLED goes < mendations. recom- manufacturer's to according antifreeze, Fill with water required and–if with awasher – voir. All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser- spilled. ger fireof and to personal safety if the fluid is engine components. Otherwise there is a dan- containers. observe the instructions for use provided on the there is the danger of bodily injury. Always container outofreach ofchildren. Otherwise, only andstore sources in closed the original Filler neck for washer fluid Washer fluid on. switched tion cally heated withthe running engine or the igni- are automati- nozzles washer windshield Both Windshield washer nozzles Approx.Capacity 5.3USquarts/5liters. the washer filling. before fluid washer the In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix hot with contact exclude to down cooled Only add washer fluid with theengine ignition from away it keep reason, this For flammable. is antifreeze fluid Washer < < < cle and cause an accident. Otherwise you could loose control of thevehi- surface. road loose and ice, rain, snow, as such conditions road in poor or traffic in heavy roads, speed,stant e.g.when driving on winding engine the isoutput insufficient. exceeded. Speedcan drop on uphill grades if on a downhill grade, the set speed may be umn. If theengine braking effect is insufficient set using the mountedlever onthe steering col- vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you km/h andhigher. The mph/30 20 of approx. The cruise controlisavailable for use at speeds concept The Cruise control Press lever to resistance point, arrow arrow point, toresistance lever Press speed Maintaining, storing and increasing 4 3 2 1 functions all for lever One and stored. The display The speed currentlybeing driven is maintained pe nrae yruhy1mh1km/h. mph/1 1 roughly by increases speed Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's speed. regulated this indicates below, see Resuming stored speed Interrupting anddeactivating system decelerating Maintaining speed, storing speed, and Maintaining, storing and increasing speed ing conditions that do not permit acon- Do notuse the cruise control under driv- 1 in the speedometer, < 1 : reduced. as same areFunctions the Press the lever up or down, arrow down, or up lever the Press Interrupting system Pull the lever, arrow decelerating Maintainingstoring speed, and speed, The stored speed is resumed and maintained. play 2 1 Displaysinstrument in cluster > Deactivating system button Press storedspeed Resuming The speed stored in the memory is deleted. > > > > > rupted: inter- In automatically is the system addition, release the lever. and stores your current speed as soon as you the accelerator pedal. Thesystem maintains vehicleThe accelerates without pressure on time: alonger for point resistance to lever Press Selected speed is displayed briefly Stored speed Press the lever upor down twice, arrow Switch offthe ignition when you brake with the handbrake when the DSC comes on lever selector the for shiftingmanual with the shift paddles or when braking 1 in the speedometer changes color. 4 : 2 : 65 1 ; the speed is is speed the ; 3 : the dis- 3

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 3 2 temperature display,clock Odometer, outside control under Everything 1 > > button: Press Odometer and trip odometer puter onpage Time, outside temperature, refer to Com- briefly displayed with ignition switched off, odometer is reset is with ignition switched on,trip odometer 66 67 Tachometer Checking coolant level, level, Checking coolant topage refer Display. Control onthe appears a message addition, In up. lights lamp warning a hot, too become the andwithShould coolant, it engine the Coolant temperature warning field, arrow The advance warning field, arrow fuel fuel is interrupted toprotect engine. the ing field. Athigh revs in this range, theflow of Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn- possible. rise as far as the orange warning field whenever increases. Avoid allowing the engine speed to ature rises, the permissible engine speed also thetemperature. engine the As temper- engine 2 , change depending on 1 , and the red 211 . Engine oil thermometer ensured and damage can occur. are engine not functions otherwise km, 50 message remains on the Control Display. the km, miles/50 30 ofapprox. arange Below the remaining range is shown in the computer. brieflymessage Display; ontheControl appears the reached, a quantity has After reserve been Reserve on page liters. will refueling on findYou information 70 gal/ US Fuel tankcapacity: 18.5 approx. Fuel gauge between 175 generalThe operating temperaturelies example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly. for areas, mountainous in driving are you when If the tilt ofthe vehicle varies for a longer period, 265 not exceed a value of approx. engine outputis reduced. missiblespeed, engine and with it the available If the high, temperature per- engine oil is the too riigrneflsblw3 miles/ 30 cruisingfalls below range Refuel as soon as possible once your 198 . 7 /80 6 and250 7 < 7 /120 /130 6 6 . Do . Do . data display by pressing the CHECK button. CHECK the pressing by display data It is tochange possible timethe and between display in place ofthe gearindicator. lower the in shown are level oil and sumption > > > > specified order: the in displayed is information following The the Press turnbutton the on signal lever. Displaysinstrument in cluster Computer fully, e.g. on bridgesand fully, e.g.on page Control Display, refer to Units of measure on can You set unit the ofmeasure risk. shade, otherwise there is an increased accident an increased danger of ice. sage appears on the Control Display. There is sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes- If the display drops to+37 warning temperature Outside page time, refer the Setting to Time on page Oil level, refer to Checking engine oil level Average fuel consumption Cruising range temperature Time andoutside < 76 The cruising range, average fuel con- transmission: Manual +3 Even at temperatures above +37 . 6 iceform. can Therefore, drivecare- 208 sections of road in the the in road of sections 7 67 /+3 75 7 6 . or or , asignal 6 7 onthe / <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 3. 2. 1. ensured and damage can occur. ensured damage and km, otherwise engine functions are not 50 km. 30 miles/ 20 last the over style driving the on based with the remaining fuel. The range is projected Displays the estimated cruising range available range Cruising o operating principle refer topage For You can also call up the computer via iDrive. Displayson Control Display computer Trip to and following the to refer Display, Control the on routes ferent You can display the average speed for two dif- For different routes onds. button onturn signal lever forapprox. 2 sec- average resetTo fuel consumption:pressBC the time during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for fuel consumption Average Select "Car Data" and press the press controller. and Data" "Car Select Open "Car Data". Without navigationWithout system "Navigation". button. controller the Move tothe right toopen This opens the start menu. the Press riigrneflsblw3 miles/ cruising range falls below 30 as as possibleRefuel soon once your 68 * * : < . 16 . of averageof speed. switched off areincluded not inthe calculations Periods withthevehicle parkedthe engine and > > > 1. manually a distance Entering 2. 1. fuel consumption: average and You can reset the values for the average speed valuesResetting > 4. Average fuel consumption Average speed Cruising range controller. the andpress todest." "Distance Select troller again. To confirm your selection, press thecon- the controller. Selectthe respective pressmenu item and > > remaining distance: arrivaland atdestination time of Estimated troller. Select "Onboard info" and press the con- system Entering adestination in thenavigation puter, see below. com- the in manually distance a Entering * , refer topage 122 . 4. 3. 3. 2. 1. values: all ting reset- or computer, trip the stopping or Starting > > > > > Trip computer tem destinationnavigation guidance the of sys- the duringpreset is automatically distance The 3. 2. 2. 1. trip.vacation The trip computer is suitable, for example, for a troller. Select "Trip computer" and press the con- Select"Car Data" and press thecontroller. Data". "Car Open Press the controller. Select the desired menu item. Select "Set" and press the controller. Average fuel consumption Average speed traveled Distance Driving time Departure time Press the controller to apply the setting. the apply to controller the Press ence. enter a larger differ- slight resistance to a against it hold needed, If destination. your Turn controller the toselect the to distance Without navigation system navigation Without "Navigation". Open menu. start the Open * . * : 3. 2. 1. puter in assistance the window. You can display the computer or the trip com- Display options check is due. km signals that the miles/2,000 break-in 1,200 The first oil change displayed at approx. the ignition switched on. the nextmaintenance are displayedbriefly with The remaining driving distancefor and thedate requirements Service Press the controller. computer". "Trip or info" "Onboard Select troller. con- the press and window assistance the to change rightto the to controller the Move 69

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control the remote control.the by requirements reading outthe in data stored 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 6. every entry. canrequest You more informationdetailed on mandated inspections. maintenance procedures, as well as legally and service selected of a list shows display The page trol Display. For operating principle refer to onthe maintenance scope onthe Con- mation infor- detailed more of display a select can You Additional information selected and press the controller. the press and selected controller until "Service requirements" is fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe ler. Select "Service Info" and press thecontrol- ler. "InfoSelect sources" and press the control- menu. Press the controller to open the Open the start menu. Select "Status" and press the controller. the press and "Status" Select 16 mine your vehicle's current service Your ServiceBMW Advisor can deter- . 70 < arrange a service appointment. Symbols 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. ensured. tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not correctly, refer to page the on sure date Make Controlthe Display is set inspections* Entering deadlines for legally required To To exit fromthe menu: Select entry and the press controller.the Select the arrow and press the controller. Select "Status" and press the controller. the press and "Status" Select controller. the press and selected controller until "Service requirements" is toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe ler. Select "Service Info" and press thecontrol- ler. "InfoSelect sources" and press thecontrol- menu. Press the controller to open the Open the start menu. The service deadline has already passed. inspectiondated is approaching. Please man- legally a or service for deadline The required. currently is service No 75 , otherwise the effec- the , otherwise 7. messages at the bottom of the ofthe Display. bottom atthe Control messages text signal and anacoustic if and necessary cluster, instrument the in lamps warning and indicator of consists message Control Check infunction monitored the vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal- CheckThe Control functionsmonitors in the concept The ControlCheck 9. 8. To exit the menu: 12. 11. 10. Select the arrow and press controller.the controller. and Select inspection" "State press the Turn the controller to make the adjustment. the make controller to the Turn controller.selected. isThe month Select "Set service date" and press the The date entry is stored. setting. the apply to controller the Press adjustment. the make controller to the Turn selected. is year The setting. the apply to controller the Press systems. This kind of kind This systems. displayed later, also refer topage be can and are stored messages text and lamps warning The time. short a after disappears visible even when the Check Control message been generated. The symbol continues to be different combinations andcolors. in up light can lamps warning and indicator The lamps warning and Indicator played indicator and warning lamps. thetrol explain Display meaning of dis- the Text message at the bottom edge of the Con- Explanatory text messages means that a Check Control message has has message Control aCheck that means 71 72 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control Exit Exit the displayed information: as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on. In urgent cases, this information will beshown need for action, see below. ofcause themalfunction oncorresponding and Check Control messages later, e.g. on the most on information additional display can You prx 0seconds, but remain stored.approx. 20 are automatically hiddenOther messages after succession. occur simultaneously, they are displayed in cannot be hidden. If anumber of malfunctions until the malfunctions have been rectified. They Some Check Control messages are displayed CHECK onturn button the lever. signal Press Control messagesHiding Check Select the arrow and press the controller. 72 iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Displaying additional information later 2. 1. messages Displaying Control storedCheck 4. 3. 2. 1. ent message is displayed. When the button is pressed again, a differ- button: the Press The first stored message is displayed. button the longer:Press selected and press the controller. the press and selected controllerTurn the until "Service Info" is controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "Info sources" is menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press inciple refer topage 16 . 5. played with the following following with the symbols: played stored Check Control messages are also dis- Depending onyour vehicle's equipment, the Indicationof malfunction urgency 6. To exit the display: Select the arrow and press controller.the is selected and press the controller. controller until "Check Control messages" Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- and the press message atext Select shown ontheControl Display. information is function, supplementary the mal- on Depending systems. tored Malfunctions are present in the moni- systems. tored moni- the in present are malfunctions No 4. 3. 2. 1. Speed limit > > The display goes out in buttontoview CHECK them succession. the you present, are sages mes- several If 2seconds. approx. for button the messages once again. Press the CHECK Before thedisplay disappears, you can display ignition.the are shown consecutively when you switch off Malfunction reports generated during the trip Displays after completionof trip iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage limit changing or setting Displaying, km/h. mph/5 againby at least3 it below falls speed vehicle your if time second You are only warned reachingof this speed a an urban area. in limit speed a exceed you if warnings receive speed. This enables you, for example, to message indicateswhenreached youhave this You can enter a speed and a CheckControl vice requirements display, refer topage ser- the of status the indicate also symbols The Select "Limit" and press the controller. the press and "Limit" Select Select"Car Data" and press thecontroller. Data". "Car Open Without navigation system navigation Without "Navigation". Open menu. start the Open o prx seconds approx. 2 for buttonagain the press when you CHECK after a period brief automatically can continue topress 73 * : 69 16 . .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 4. 3. 7. 6. 5. speed as the limit. controller. The system adopts your current Select "Select current speed" and press the limit as speed current your Applying > > > or resetting stopping Starting, 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for Stopwatch Select "On" and press thecontroller. Activating limit Limit is Limit activated. automatically ler. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control- the press controller. and Data" "Car Select Open "Car Data". The limitThe activated. is automatically controller the toapply the Press setting. difference. alarger enter to resistance aslight against it hold needed, Turn controller the the toset Iflimit. troller. Selectthe presscon-value speed and the This stops the stops timer. This Select "Stop" and press the controller. runningwas beforehand. stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it The Select "Reset" and press the controller. the starts displayed stopwatch at time. The Select "Start" and press the controller. navigationWithout system "Navigation". Open Open the start menu. 74 inciple refer topage * : 16 . iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Settings on Control Display ground. stopwatch continues operation in the back- count. stopwatch primary The interim time appears below the ongoing Select "Interim time" and press the controller. Taking an intermediate time reading 3. 2. 1. selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. Press the controller to open the or button once untiltwice menu appears. start the the Press even while the stopwatch is running. The available remain functions other the of All < inciple refer topage 16 . 1. time Setting 2. 3. selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Time /Date" is top. tochange essary firstto thethe field from controller if the front Move tothe once nec- and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected Switching on hour signal* hour on Switching The changed time is stored. 2. 1. settingsMaking rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 2. 1. Setting 12h/24h format rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. each hour. willYou topof hear justbefore the three tones 4. The signalhour is activated. press the controller. Turn controller the the and toset minutes press the controller. Turn controller the the toset and hours controller. Select the desired format and press the ler. Select "Timeformat" press and control- the selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Set time" is 75

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 1. Setting date 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for the change setting. basic lightingambient conditions. However, youcan tothe adapted is automatically brightness The ofControl DisplayBrightness use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 2. 1. Setting date format 5. 4. 3. 2. Select "Date" and press the controller. controller. the settings" andpress "Display Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press controller. Select the desired format and press the ler. control- and the press format" "Date Select date the adjustment, stored. is last remaining the Make After adjustments. the selected. is setting next The controller toapply the the Press setting. Turn controller thethe tomake adjustment. selected, in this case the month. first ofthe displayThe date is section Select "Set date" and press thecontroller. 76 inciple refer topage 16 . iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for sure. sumption, distances, temperature and pres- You can change theunits of measure for con- Units of measure 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 7. 6. 5. the controller. controller until "Units" is selected and press toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe controller. the press / and Units" "Language Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press is selected. Turn the controller until the desired setting to select "Display". the If necessary, move controller right tothe press the controller. controller until "Brightness" is selected and toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe inciple refer topage 16 . 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 7. 6. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage Languageon Control Display rentlyuse. in The settings are stored for the remote key cur- 7. 6. press the controller. and selected is "Languages" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller. the press and / Units" "Language Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press pressing the controller.pressing the Select andactivate language desired the by text displays. troller. You can change the ofthelanguage Select "Text language" and press the con- press the controller. Select the desired unit of measure and the controller. Select the andpress item set tobe menu 16 . 4. 3. 2. 1. exceeded.below or and maximum volume that cannot be dropped The warning tones have specifieda minimum soundoutput. tothe entertainment compared belt for reminder, e.g. safety tones, the warning can increase or decrease the volume of the On vehicles equipped with a single drive, you Volume of warning tones* The The issetting applied. controller. the turn field and the change If necessary, press the controller. and tones" necessary. "Warning Select totheChange second field from topifthe controller. the press and settings" "Volume Select troller. con- the press and Volume" / "Tone Select 77

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety that the system warning was late. too was warning system that the mean would circumstances the physical erwise athigh anobject Avoid approaching oth- speed, parking. when case the usually is as slowly, m. ft/1.50 5 atapprox. sensors rear center and the cm, for in/60 24 atapprox. ners cor- rear two the at and front the at sensors the However, an acoustic warning first sounds for m. ft/2 is range approx. sensors 7 of these The are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper. your vehicle. To measure the distance, there you to the approach of an object from behind Acoustic signals and anoptical display and signals Acoustic The PDCassists you when you are parking. concept The Control* Distance Park PDC safety and convenience comfort, for Technology Press the button, the LED button,the up. the lights LED Press Manual activation time before driving this short Wait off. ignition switchedor the running on. engine Rwith intothe selector lever position you reverse after or the into shift gear move 1second approx. to starts operate system The Automatic activation objects when they are approached indicate aparking aid is can that PDC 78 < * alert alert > > 3seconds: is interrupted approx. after intermittent tone An sounds. continuous tone a then cm, ft/30 roughly 1 falls tobelow object tothe tance nearest shorter. If become dis- tones the the between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals rear speaker,theetc. distancebetween As will be indicated by asi vehicle the rear object ofthe left to detected an Thus, intervalspondinglytone. indicated by an anobject, nearing position is corre- the When Signal tones reactivate the system manually as needed. switchedgoesLEDcan out. the You off and is system the km/h, mph/30 20 approx. atover or m ft/50 drivingAfter approx. 165 deactivation Automatic out. goes buttonagain; LED the the Press deactivation Manual a tosound. tone a signal Exhaustgases near the rear sensors cancause tothem. cm 4 in/10 at least of distance a maintain and periods long for ers with clean- the high-pressure sensors not spray that they will continue to operate effectively. Do freeclean and ice ofsnow or inorderto ensure preventproblem,sensors thisTo keep the functioning. the Have system checked. mal- is PDC Display. Control the on appears amessage and flashes button in the LED The Malfunction if you drive parallel to a wall a to parallel drive you if ofthe one only by sensors detected corner if in ofanobject remain front you was that gnal tone left tone the gnal from soon as PDC is asPDC soon activated. as Display Control the on appears display The 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 6. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage use. in currently control remote the a signal tone sounds. The setting is stored for before there shown already are away farther are that Control Objects Display. onthe to objects distances show system have the can also You warning* visual with PDC rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press the controller. controller until "PDC" is selectedpress and Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Vehicle /Tires" is selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" troller. con- the press and on" display "PDC Select The PDC screen is activated. is screen PDC The 16 . vehicle, signal drown could PDC tone. out the theoutside sound, inside sources Loud of and injurypersonal property or damage. drive with care; otherwise, there is dangera of reason, this For detected. be cannot ledges, already sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. before again sensors after or a tone continuous ofthe area the detection from disappear also curbs,can already objects Low displayed,e.g. plings, or thin and wedge-shaped objects etc. with bars andtrailerencountered tow cou- such those as of ultrasonic measurement, forms to all apply that limits physical the to ject sub- also is system The detected. be longer no can objects which in spot blind a is there vided, with the driver. Even when sensors are pro- remains always obstructions any and vehicle System limits System rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior. The system controls the brake pressure in the distribution brake-force Electronic ing response are improved further. steer- and stability driving change, a lane during When braking during curves or when braking CBC Brake Control Cornering engine. Braking safely refer topage The ABS is operational every time you start the increased. even during full braking. Active safety is thus maintained is response steering Safe braking. ABS prevents locking of the wheels during ABS Antilock Brake System vehicle stability under extreme conditions. of systems designed to enhance and maintain Your BMW is equipped with an extended array systems Driving stability control estimating the distance between the the distance between the estimating Even with PDC, final responsibility for 79 115 . <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety The The indicator lamp stays lit: isDSC deactivated. trols the drive forces and brake forces. for the the for oftheduration full braking. the notreduce Do brake on pressure the pedal ABS. vided by ing. This systemexploitsbenefitsthe all of pro- est possible braking distance during full brak- toachieve the thushelps boostand short- force automatically the produces braking maximum youapplyWhen thebrakes rapidly, thissystem assistant Brake the engine is started. is timedeactivated each Mode Dynamic M The state. driving this in required be also may corrections lute drivinglimitis reached. Additionalsteering until abso- the wheels the at and braking output stabilizing intervention by reducing the engine vehicle stability. Thesystem does not provide with ondry however limited surfaces, tion road with greater longitudinal and lateral accelera- driving enables It Control. Stability Dynamic DSC the of mode a is Mode Dynamic M The Dynamic Mode MDM M Indicator lamp further taking by risks. margin safety driver. Therefore, donotreduce the additional the of the responsibility always remains style engine. is operationalThe DSC everytimeyoustart the braking theat wheels. reducinglimits by the engine outputandby keep the vehicle on course within the physical understeering and oversteering, and helps as such states driving unstable detects also It traction. and stability vehicle optimizes DSC Stability Dynamic DSC Control even with DSC. An appropriate driving The laws ofphysics cannot be repealed, The indicator lamp flashes: DSCcon- the started. is engine after indicator The goes outshortly lamp 80 < ing forces. Mode is active and controls the drive and brak- Dynamic the indicator theDSC lamp flashes: M The indicator lamp lights upcontinuously and isMode activated. iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Display. Control the on MDrive theWith onyou switched ignition canset 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. page to refer on wheel, MDrive steering the button on with Mode Dynamic the activate You M the Activating MDM Indicator lamp deactivated whenever possible. erwise there is a risk of an accident. to a reduced degree. Take action yourself, oth- controller. Select "M Dynamic andMode" press the Select "DSC" and press the controller. Select "MDrive" and press the controller. menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press 50 DSC activated and the M Dynamic Mode Mode Dynamic and activated M DSC the with drive stability, vehicle maintain To bilizing interventions are only carried out out carried only are interventions bilizing sta- activated, Mode Dynamic M the With h niao apsaslt Dynamic The indicator lamp stays lit: M the is started. after engine indicatorThe goes outshortly lamp . inciple refer topage < < 16 . Manual transmission Manual there. appears that Please note any supplementary information Display. onthe Control appears A message deactivated. lamp lights up continuously. DSC and MDMare when is deactivated.when DSC engine outputmaybe briefly reduced even tractionUnder conditions,unfavorable the andholdPress button. MDM the goes out. goes Press thePress DSC OFF button to briefly deactivate DSC. useful be can it surfaces, road loose on or snow When rocking free or starting off from deep ble. M Dynamic Mode with the MDM button. with Mode MDM Dynamic the M can You activate also anddeactivate the Deactivating DSC MDM button the or wheel steering the buttonon the Press Deactivatingagain MDM < the system activated whenever possi- To maintain vehicle stability, drive with * again; the MDM indicator lamp * : * ; the DSC indicator DSC ; the Press the MDM button. MDM the Press possible. defective. Have the system checked as soon as as possible. as soon checked system the Have operational. remains vehicle nance functions are no longer available. The Have the system checked as soon as possible. or the FlatTire Monitor is also malfunctioning. brake applications. The Tire Pressure Monitor tiously and drive defensively while avoiding full systems Malfunction in driving-stability control transmission Manual MDrive onpage buttononthe steering refer wheel, to the can You activate also anddeactivate with DSC in instrument cluster goesthe out. button;the lamp the indicator Press OFF DSC Reactivating DSC Control Display. The brake assistant is is assistant brake The Display. Control onthe appears yellow. Amessage up The brake system warning lamplights mainte- stability The MDM. including malfunction has occurred in DSC A up. lights lamp warning DSC The malfunction in Canadian models. described previously the of Display should remember to proceed cau- you continue, may you While tions. without available limita- ciency remains braking effi- Conventional failed. have systems control driving-stability The sage appears on theControl Display. Monitor or Flat Tire Monitor. A mes- Pressure Tire and DSC forABS, lamps lights up,together with the indicator The warninglampfor the brake system 50 . * : 81

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety be noticed fromshakin rapid succession of starts on slopes. This can behavior is changedunder heavyloading,e.g. a the starting-off overheating, from Transmission theTo protect clutch ofthe Sequential Manual Transmission. can result in the area theof Sequential Manual instead. Otherwise overheating and heavy wear erator, but apply the orhandbrake footbrake roll backward. andyour vehicle to seconds start will approx. 2 after vehicle the holds longer no assistant to drive immediately; otherwise, the starting footbrake. After releasing the footbrake,begin 2. 1. required for this purpose. conveniently Theon slopes. handbrakeis not off tostart you enables assistant starting The On slopes Starting assistant tect the clutch. This can result in thevehicle fail- agement system limits the engine speed to pro- longer periods is detected and the engine man- the protection for clutch. Riding clutch the for equipped overloadis withan M5 Your BMW ods. Be sure to avoid riding the clutch for longer peri- transmission Clutchprotection with manual 1. slippery a On surface 2. Release the footbrake and and offquickly. footbrake drive the Release Hold the vehicle with the footbrake. Dynamic Control, refer to page to refer Control, Dynamic Engine Select program "P ofM 400" wheels from spinning when starting off. accelera press Gently the vehiclehill on a bypressing the accel- hold not Do slopes. on quickly off Start for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the the after releasing seconds approx. 2 for vehicle the holds assistant starting The malfunction in Canadian models. Canadian in malfunction Display of the previously described 82 < < g during starting off. tor toprevent pedal 59 . and steering. ofshockabsorbers coordination fort-oriented com- want ifyou program "Comfort" the Select "Comfort" program You can choose from three programs. asecond. of fraction new conditions a tothe within ically adjusts ing, braking etc. change, the damping automat- assteer- such conditions operating or quality surface road as such variables influencing the If concept The Control Electronic Damping EDC logic: Drive- with Transmission Manual Sequential Selecting program ers and steering. absorb- ofshock coordination sistently sporty acon- want ifyou program "Sport" the Select "Sport" program andtheture program. comfort of sport the abalanced mix- offers program "Normal" The "Normal" program partially depressed. toaccelerate ing when clutchthe is pedal to MDrive onpage button onthe steering refer wheel, with the can You activatealso your preferred program engine the is started. The last selected program is active each time > > > EDC the Press button repeatedly: transmission: Manual rected and after every tire or wheel change. pressure. inflation tire rect tire, the system must be initialized for the cor- ofa reliable reporting the flat toassure In order requirement Functional tire. flat asa reports changeit and this detects system rotationof speed the correspondingwheel. The in the rolling circumference and therefore the pressureIn the event a of loss, there changeisa ual wheels during driving. one tirecomparingby the speedsthe ofindivid- The Flat Tire Monitor detects apressure lossin concept The FTM FlatTire Monitor* "Sport": both LEDs light up. light"Sport": LEDs both lights up. one LED "Normal": off. LED "Comfort": each timeeach the tire inflation pressure is cor- after repeated be must initialization The 50 . < 3. 2. 1. button in the center console: the via Transmission Sequential Manual With tem when driving with snow chains. notinitialize Do automatically. tinued the sys- When driving resumes, the initialization is con- Initializing system Initializing > > > > malfunction: or delayed be could system the situations, following In the tires. four all in drop and does notdetect a natural, even pressure severe tire damage caused byoutside factors The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate sudden limits System without feedback. The initialization finishes during driving todrive. Start afew playseconds. for Dis- onthe Control appears izing ..." FTM "Initial- The tire. message ofaflat Indication to refer cluster, instrument the in onds sec- several for yellow in up lights lamp buttonis released, After warning the the seconds. Press the button for approx. 5 theStart not driving. butdo engine, start Driving with snow chains high lateral acceleration Sporty drivingstyle: slip inthe drive wheels, surface road slippery or snowy on Driving System has not beeninitialized which canbe interrupted atanytime. The initialization finishes during driving, 83 * <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 8. 7. 6. page to refer principle operating for iDrive, Via rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press the controller. controlleruntil "FTM"selected is press and fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until "Settings" is Select "Yes" and press the controller. Select "Reset" and press the controller. the Start driving. butdonotstart engine, 16 : 84 3. 2. 1. loss. isThereflat a tireextensive or inflation pressure Indicationflat tire ofa every tire or wheel change. ensured. erwise fault-free operation of the system is not Always usewheels electronics,with TPM oth- inflation pressure. correct reset atthe tire be must system the tire, In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat Functional requirement erably in one or several tires. consid- dropped has pressure inflation tire the four mounted tires. The system reports when checksTPM the tire inflation pressure in the concept The TPM TirePressure Monitor* 9. refer toChanging wheels onpage to page refer System, Mobility M with tire flat Repair pressure page on System, refer to Producing tire inflation Mobility tire inflation pressure using the M tire. damaged Identify To do this, check the maneuvers. fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care- without feedback. without The initialization finishes during driving todrive.Start onds. cluster lightsment up for sec- yellow a few instru- the in lamp warning The seconds. "resetting …" isFTM displayed for a few tion of the tire inflation pressure andafter tire ofthe tion inflation pressure correc- each after again system the Reset In addition, an acoustic signal sounds. sounds. signal anacoustic addition, In sage on appears the Control Display. The warning lamp lights up red. A mes- 217 , or replace the damaged wheel, 219 . < 219 . same radiofrequency. with by other systems or devices which use the electronics, or if TPMis temporarily interfered TPM without tire if hasbeen mounted awheel The systeminactive is cannotdisplay and flat a correct tire inflation pressures. not beenreset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite The system does not function properly if it has damage caused byexternal influences. TPM cannotannouncesudden serious tire limits System > > > Reasons for this can be: tire. cannotdetect aflat system The Gray Display. Control on the appears Amessage tires. several tire in inflation drop Flat in amajor pressure or All wheelsyellow are Control Display. onthe indicatedthe appears tire. Amessage tire in inflation drop Flat in amajor pressure or is yellow One wheel play. active""TPM is displayed onthe Control Dis- learned the tire pressure set state. matches The Green color.the tion is only required if requested by TPMwith changes during driving into account. A correc- factthattheTPM takes the tire pressure tires. color ofthe tire statusis indicated The the system and by Statusdisplay Control on Display Malfunction quency devices which use thesame radio fre- or Temporary interference due to systems TPM is being reset values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur- finishes Resetting monitored. be to values set the asthe applied in pressures tires are tion ofdriving, afew the minutes After infla- tire set 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage resetting is continued automatically. driving When resumes, time. interrupted atany Resetting finishes during driving, which canbe every tire or wheel change. Resetting system TPM..." is displayed. is TPM..." "Resetting and in gray are shown The tires todrive. Start Select "Yes" and press the controller. Select "Reset" and press the controller. theStart not driving. butdo engine, start the controller. press and selected is "TPM" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press tion of the tire inflation pressure and after ofthe after tion and pressure inflation tire Reset the system againafter each correc- 85 < 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety with correspondinglypersonnel. trained works according to BMWrepair procedures workshop informed on handling TPMwhich Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a andafter resetting the mounting system. after monitored also and is electronics TPM play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed. is low!" "Tire The message play. onthe inall shown Control yellow tires Dis- are Control Display. ing driving. Thetiresare in shown green onthe > > situations: following the in displayed is this like message A be detected. can tire flat No displayed. is a message and play The spare tire 3. 2. 1. pressure loss. sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure Message withinflationtire low Malfunction tronics If a wheel is mounted without TPMelec- have the system checked. In case of a malfunction; on page wheel or wheels, refer to Changing wheels* refer to page System, Mobility M with tire flat Repairing tify tire on damaged the vehicle.the If all four wheels are shown in yellow, iden- maneuvers. fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care- and applying the tire inflation pressures, If aflat duringtire is detected resetting are shown in gray on Control Dis- in gray the on shown are then lights up continuously. Thetires The yellow warning lamp flashes and signal anacoustic addition, play. In Dis- onthe Control appears message The warning lamp lights up yellow. A 219 86 * is equipped with necessary the . 217 , or replace the damaged < properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction malfunction TPMS the check Always properly. vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the including variety ofreasons, installation of the malfunctionsintended.TPMS occura for may able tire pressurebe to as detect signal or low not may system up, the lights indicator function long as the malfunction exists. Whenthe mal- continue uponsubsequent vehicle startups as continuously illuminated. This sequence will for approximately one minute and then remain flash will telltale the a malfunction, detects tem sys- the telltale. When pressure tire low the with iscombined indicator malfunction TPMS The TPMSlow the tire pressure telltale. levelnot reached the totrigger illumination of correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has is it and driver's the responsibility to maintain tire proper for maintenance, not a substitute stopping ability. thatthe Please note is TPMS handling the and vehicle's affect may and life, tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread failure. totire lead Underinfla- can and overheat under-inflatedicantly tire thecauses tire to toproperthem the pressure. Drivingsignif- a on inflate and possible, as soon as tires your check and stop should you illuminates, telltale sure inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- under- significantly are tires your of more or alow pressure telltale tire one when nates pressure monitoring system, TPMS,thatillumi- equipped with your atirehas been vehicleture, pressure for those tires.Asansafety added fea- you should determine the proper tire inflation or pressure tire inflation label,vehicle placard sizedifferent thanthe indicatedsize onthe tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla- inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle checked monthly when cold and inflated to the Each Each tire, including the spare Systems FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Declaration according to NHTSA/ > same radio frequency. use the which devices or systems other If TPMis withinterfered by temporarily * , should be , should head air bagsupports thehead. bag supports the side upper body area.The the event of side impact. The relevant side air- in protection provide help airbags side and head vide adequate restraint. When needed, the impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- front passenger by responding to frontal The front airbags help protect the driver and page on instructions adjustment the observe please the TPMStocontinuethe tofunction properly. allow wheels and tires alternate or replacement wheels onyour vehicle ensureto thatthe or tires replacing ortelltale one after more Protective action 3 2 1 marked covers: the under are located following airbags The Airbags Side airbags in front and rear and in front airbags Side airbags Head airbags Front 41 tinue to provide optimized protection, tinue optimized toprovide protection, con- systems safety the that ensure To . < On On the right: heavy braking. left:braking. normal On the display force Brake bag generators executed air- of disposal and removal, repair, testing, the triggering of the airbag restraint system, have or deactivation, malfunctions, of event In the gered, because there is a danger of burns. been trig- thehas after system immediately components individualtouch the not Do wheel. steering dismantle the or toremove attempt with along the headliner. not ofthe Do sides instrument panel, thedoors and the roof pillars stery inthecenter the ofsteering wheel, the on bag system. This category includes the uphol- wiring the or theindividualin air- components either with the or notmodify tamper vehicle.Do removeairbag the restraintsystem fromthe to notattempt in Do other modify way. any them dents or rear-end collisions. every impact lesssituation, severe acci- e.g. airbags The deliberatelyare nottriggered in cover panelsthe ofairbags, coverthem or tothe materials notapply adhesive Do ol ya BMWcenter only by 87

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety provided on the sunvisors. onthe provided also is the airbags on information and Warnings injury. personal in result could which of either emergency or undesired airbag triggering, service the system could lead to failure in an to attempts unprofessional Otherwise licenses. personnel and has the required explosives repair procedures with correspondingly trained or a workshop that works according to BMW cannot be ensured. be cannot rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface below.a Otherwise cor- the from seat against press could which the seat under objects lay are specifically recommended byBMW. Do not they unless seat passenger front onto the items orother mats ball padding, cushion seat ers, notfit Do seat seat. cov- rear person the on ing transport sitting correspond- position, the the desiredstatus beproducedbychanging cannot indicator andthe vated goes out.If lamp the are acti- airbags passenger the front that so up. In change the cases, these positionsitting the lamp airbags for front cator lights passenger the in indi- then certain sitting positions; adults ger side can be deactivated for teenagers and onthe passen- front front airbags The side and porting children safely refer topage mation andhandling instructions under Trans- passengerfollowing. airbagsin the rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front theindicated by over indicator interior lamp the tem. or deactivatedactivated accordingly by sys- the are side passenger onthe front airbags side front seat. frontand The passenger ofthe face theuating impression occupiedon the seat sur- The occupation of the seat is detected by eval- passenger airbags Automatic deactivation of front passenger seat, observe the safety infor- safety the observe seat, passenger achildtransporting frontBefore onthe i.e. activated, deactivated or is airbag, The current status of the front passenger 88 < < 53 . < > > not activated. are airbags passenger the child's seat has beendetectedthe and front that indicates up. This lights airbags passenger thatthe sure lamp indicator make the for front achild's seat, After installing manufactured. required by at the timethe theNHTSA vehicle is > deactivated. activated or are airbags the passenger whether front shows lamp tor depending onthe occupation.seat Theindica- andsideairbags on thefront passenger side front of the operating status the indicates bags The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- differlamps may somewhat. arrangementswitches the of indicator and Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the airbags passenger stateoffront Operating front passenger side are notactivated. side are passenger front airbags the fronton side and the However, empty. is seat the indicatorThe does notlight lamp up when senger sideare activated. airbags side pas- on the The and front front heightsufficient is seat. the on detected for example, a correctly seated person of indicatorThe does notlight lamp up when, senger side are not activated. not are side senger airbags side pas- on the The and front front purpose is properly detected on the seat. intended the for a child restraint system The indicator lamp lights up when a child in system. Especially the child's seats the by detected are seats child's Most < despite an impact of corresponding intensity. accident an in manner expected the in respond there is a danger that the airbag system may not Operational readiness ofairbag system from the the road. from take in this information without looking away e.g. navigation instructions.enables This to you tion is projected into the driver's field of view, important Display informa- theWith Head-Up concept The Head-Up Display* > > malfunctionAirbag system andthe tem safety belt tensioners. sys- airbag ofthe entire readiness operational warning lamplights up briefly, indicating the page to refer readiness, radio From Warning lamp lights up continuously. up lights lamp Warning readiness. Warning lamp does not light up from radio ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise otherwise ofamalfunction, in ately case immedi- checked system airbag the Have 56 , the < 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Switching on/off Switching iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage Selecting displays the Press button. is selectedis presscontroller. and the Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" into second Change the thefield from top. selected and press the controller. controller until "Head-Up Display" is Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller. and Select "Display settings" press the controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press 89 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety currently in use. control the remote for are stored settings The wheel, refer to MDrive on page on to MDrive refer wheel, button onthe steering selected with the The Mviewfor theDisplay Head-Up can also be 7. 8. 3 2 1 Default view play. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis- in be cannot and in selected. gray the Mview appears on the Control Display inunavailable Display. Information Head-Up Up Display. Press the controller. Speed Stored desired speed of cruise control instructionsNavigation "M View": "M the default view is displayed. "M "M View": the Mview appears in the in the appears Head- information The 90 50 . tachometer, refer topage tachometer, informationFor onthe shift lights in the 5 4 3 2 1 view" "M iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for lighting. instrument the with the adjusted be can also knurled wheel of the brightness on, switched beams low the With However, you can change thebasic setting. lighting conditions. ambient the to adapted display ofthe brightness is automatically The brightness Setting 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Gear display Speed to Tachometer on page to Tachometer Red warning field of tachometer, also refer tachometer of field warning Advance Current engine speed, highlighted selected and press the controller. the press and selected is Display" "Head-Up until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe controller. the andpress Selectsettings" "Display controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press inciple refer topage 62 66 . 16 . 6. respondinglypersonnel. trained according toBMWrepair procedures with cor- works that or center aworkshop aBMW by Windshield replacement should be carried out displayed. being from images double the cise display. A film in the windshield prevents apre- toenable Display Head-Up ofthe ments of the windshield complies with the require- The windshieldis part the ofsystem. Theshape Special windshield setting checked at a BMW center. If the image is distorted, please have the basic > > > > play is influenced by: Dis- Head-Up the in displays the of visibility The Notes rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 7. selected and press the controller. is "Brightness" until controller the Turn into second Change the thefield from top. conditions lighting unfavorable and surface road Wet play Objects on thecover of the Head-Up Dis- Certain seating positions filtersSunglassespolarization withcertain selected. is Turn the controller until the desired setting your vehicle brochure. for Caring consulting separate by this the topic You can find everything you need toknowon Care instructions damage it. a display cleaning cloth; otherwise, youmay play with a soft, nonabrasive cloth or with with or cloth nonabrasive a soft, with play clean Dis- theOnly ofthe Head-Up cover < 91

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Lamps Parking lamps/low beams Lamps in position The low lightbeams up when the light switch is beamsLow page to refer side, ontheswitch lamps onone roadside parking sible to start the engine. It is preferable to it oftime, otherwise nolonger be may ods pos- parking forlamps parking. vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the In switch position Parking lamps position in is switch light the when off switched cally lighting exterior automati- is off, the switched If you driver's the open withdoor ignition the 3 2 1 0 Head Light ning lamps control, headlamp Automatic daytime run- Low beams and welcome lamps Parking lamps and daytime running lamps Lights off and daytime running lamps not leave them switched on for long them onfor switched peri- not leave The parking lamps drain thebattery. Do 0 , 2 2 and ignition the is on. or 92 * * 3 , welcome lamps, Adaptive Adaptive lamps, , welcome and high-beam assistant high-beam and . 1 94 , the front, rear and side side and rear , the front, . < * * * low beams manually under these conditions. safety risks,shouldyou alwaysswitch on the cannot detect of hazyfog weather. Toavoid lighting conditions. For example, thesensors toambient on switched response be in should in lamps judgment determining when the lightscause the to be switched on. can horizon the on low sun the with sky blue A low beams. tothe over switches automatically then system page to refer the lamps, running daytime activate lights up when the low beams are on. You can Light and in ofcase precipitation. Adaptive Head tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk response to changes in lightambient condi- offin them onor andswitches beams low In switch position Automatic headlamp control iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for lamps Activating/deactivating welcome If you leave the light switch in position Welcome lamps 4. 3. 2. 1. ing remain illuminated for a brief time. brief a for illuminated remain ing and interior light- parking vehicle, the lamps the when parking the vehicle, then when you unlock troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press * 93 serve as a substitute for your personal your for asasubstitute serve The automatic headlamp control cannot is active. The LED next to the symbol tothe next symbol The is LED active. . In the situations named above, the named . In situations above, the 3 , the system activates the activates , the system inciple refer topage 2 or or 16 3

< . 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 6. 5. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage tion via iDrive. deactivate func- the or duration the canset You the low beams will come on for abrief period. parking the vehicle and switching offthe lamps, When you activate the headlamp flasher after Pathway lighting 6. press the controller. and isselected "Lighting" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open controller. lighting" and the press "Pathway Select press the controller. and isselected "Lighting" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. Select "Welcome light" and press the con- The welcome lamps are switched on. switched are lamps welcome The 16 . ignition is switched off. rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. position iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage running lamps* Activating/deactivating daytime position The daytime running lamps light upin Daytime running lamps* rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 8. 7. switched on. switched the controller. press and lamps" running "Daytime Select press the controller. controller until "Lighting" is selected and Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open Press the controller to apply the setting. the apply to controller the Press duration. Turn controller the toselect the desired The daytime running lamps are are lamps running daytime The 1 0 , ,

1 the the lamps lightparking upafter the and 3 . If the light switch remains in 93 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Lamps on that lighton upthe inside ofthe area curve. negotiating curves, turning areswitched lamps e.g. km/h, 70 onmountainous roads when or mph/ In tight curves atspeeds up toapprox. 45 headlampfollows course theroad. the of andother light parameters, angle the from the steering the on Depending surface. road the of illumination better thatenables control system headlamp Light avariable is Head Adaptive concept The Adaptive Head Light* 3 2 1 lamps parking roadside High beams/ position into switch theWith switch ignition Activating Adaptive Head Light curves. active the andilluminate are outer of area When driving in reverse, only the turning lamps senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. directs front Light the pas- Head light towards blinding avoid traffic, Adaptive the oncoming To of turnsignals. on depending on the steering angle or the use are switched turning lamps automatically The Roadside parking lamps flasher Headlamp High beams 94 3 , refer topage , refer ed on,turn ed the light 92 . be possible to start the tostart possible engine. be long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer 2. The concept The assistant*High-beam point, arrow up tothe resistance lever the direction in opposite press Briefly the Switching off down beyond the resistance point, arrow After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or Switching on side of your vehicle when parking: just one upof lightingoption the enjoy also You Roadside parking lamps, left or right* 1. Activating system usual. as off and on beams hightheswitch to time any at intervene can you Naturally, ibility. neously providesbestthe youwith possible vis- simulta- forth and and back switching stantly permit. This relieves youofthe burden ofcon- are switched on whenever traffic conditions the that beams high sure makes assistant The the insiderearview mirror controls the process. on front on side of off.Asensor the and beams automatically switchesThis the system high direction. pressthe turn signal inthe lever high-beam With the low beams switched on, briefly page Turn lightthe switch toposition tery. Do not leave them switched on for onfor switched notleave them Do tery. The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- 92 . < 3 . 3 , refer to , refer to 3 .

e.g. in built-up zones. vehiclesof aheadand you, sufficiently lit areas, oncoming traffic, reacting to low and beams, high beams switches between automatically to do so can pose a safety risk. safety a pose can so to do circumstancesbeams when dictate.so Failure low to switch reason, this For encountered. intervention whenunusual conditions are The system cannot completely replace driver back tolow whenbeams canbesafelybeams toquickly used and switch > tion: to alimited degree, requiring personal interven- only function may notreact or may system the Below are a few examples of situations in which beams and low beams high between switching Manually System limits System > > > intervenetime. any at can you requires, situation orthe wish you If tions such as fog or heavy precipitation heavy or asfog such tions in extremely unfavorable weather condi- lamp flasher asusual. flasher lamp When the low beams are on, use the head- direction. thepress turn signal inlever the high-beam briefly In system, the order toreactivate up toyou back toswitch beams. to low usual. This deactivates the system and it is beams, simply switch on the high beams as the but beams, low wishyou the touse high on switched has assistant high-beam If the direction. thepress turn signal inlever the high-beam briefly In system, the order toreactivate assistant. high-beam the signal the This lever. turn deactivates beams, just switch on the low beams with low use the to wish you but beams, high the on switched has assistant high-beam If the maximize the amount of time oftime that high amount the maximize The high-beam assistant is designed to assistant is activated. The system system The activated. is assistant cluster lights up the when high-beam instrument the in lamp indicator The traffic approaches. approaches. traffic < visibility andtraffic conditions. laws on high-beam switching or for adapting to state with for complying responsibility driver's The high-beam assistant cannot replace the high beams. the will reactivate system the tonormal, return ing a switch to low beams. When the conditions the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requir- interpret may system In the situations, these > > > > occur: can beams low to switching premature which in situations the of some are Below beams. low require that conditions as situations these periodically interpret may system the side, safe the on be To streetlights. example, highly reflective signs, markers, and actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and, for ability theto recognize difference between system's reduce the may conditions that to ject sub- is operation assistant High-beam tations. Moreover, no system can operate without limi- > > > > > > approaching large reflective markers approaching certain traffic signals way lighting andporch lights approaching certain lights, such as drive- signs approaching large and/orhighly reflective cleaner with glass moistened slightly acloth ror with on the side insidefront of rearview mir- the when thesensor is dirty. Clean the sensor theof inside rearview mirror covered with stickers, decals etc. in the area when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or in the low speed range ence of highly reflective signs in poorly illuminated areas and in the pres- oncoming traffichighways divided on cross-traffic, or with partially hidden in tight curves, or crests steep on withdips, deer crossings shipping trafficor road, close tothe at and equestrians, horsedrawn vehicles, railroad illumination such pedestrians,as cyclists, inherent poor with users road sensing in 95

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Lamps rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for Switching offvia iDrive beams switched on. switched beams knurled wheel with the parking lamps/low lightingThe intensity can with adjusted the be Instrument lighting 6. press the controller. and selected is "Lighting" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press the controller. press and assistant" "High-beam Select High-beamassistant is switched off. 96 inciple refer topage 16 . to to buttononpage Start/Stop off,refer switched is readiness radio after utes area before the doors. exterior the handles toilluminate door in located are lights LED lamps, courtesy the With automatically. manually Switching interior lamps on and off lamps courtesy lighting and entry door lamps, footwell lamps, interior The Interior lamps to the onandoff. to switch lamps to adjacent interior thethe Press button lamps. rear and front the in located are lamps Reading Reading lamps seconds. 3 approx. switched off continually, press the button for lighting are lamps toremain and courtesy If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry button. the Press vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min- the in lamps all battery, the protect To * arecontrolled 56 . < Automatic climate controlAutomatic climate Climate 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 Front ventilation onpage Air for the upper body region, refer to windows side and windshield the toward directed Air climate control, residual utilization control, residual heat climate offautomatic switching air volume, Manual condensation Defrosting windows andremoving Manual air distribution, driver's side compartment Temperature, left side of passenger Air tofootwell 101 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Rear window defroster window Rear car ventilationsystem parked- and utilization heat residual for LED mode recirculated-air recirculated-air Automatic AUC control/ Maximum cooling side air distribution, front Manual passenger compartment Temperature, right side of passenger manually Switching cooling function on and off program AUTO 97

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Climate played on the Control theplayed on Display. The current setting for air distribution is dis- 16 as much as possible. a way that window condensation is prevented densation sensor controls the programin such time, acon- Atthe program. same AUTO the with automatically on switched is cooling The year. the throughout influences outside to ture tempera- the for instructions your adapts It also settings onpage currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile control for remote the are stored settings Most options. setting available the on information The following sections you. to pleasant only need to select an interior temperature tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you tribution and air volume for virtually all condi- The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis- A congenial climate 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for program via iDrive. intensity canalso adjustthe AUTO You ofthe is pressed. played on the Control Display when the button respective The setting current is briefly dis- gram byrepeatedly pressing button. theAUTO pro- canadjustthe AUTO You ofthe intensity Intensity of AUTO program programAUTO please keep clear and unobstructed and clear keep please Air grillinterior for temperature – sensor mate". button. controller the Move to the left "Cli- to open This opens the start menu. the Press the upper body andinthefootwell. of direction the in windows, side distribution windshield tothe and and air ofair volume adjustment programThe handlesAUTO the 98 29 . inciple refer topage contain more detailed 16 . perature. tem- outside the of regardless output, heating In the setting highest activate you maximum the thecient time to set temperature. adjust control suffi- climate does nothave automatic keeps it constant. mum cooling orheating capacity, andthen the if maxi- with necessary of time year, at any adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible Temperature 1. region Adjusting temperature in upper body 4. 3. ting on the Control Display. Control the on ting button the the current to Press display set- program is switched on. switched is program controller. Select the desired intensity and press the controller. Select "Automatic programs" and press the perature settings in the in succession, settings perature rapid changingWhen between different tem- The marked intensity The ofthe automatic The automatic climatecontrolThe automatic passenger side. vidually on the driver's and front theSet temperature desired indi- < To do this, also switch on the cooling function. and are not part of the rear window defroster. window rear are ofthe and not part equipment, upper wires are used as an antenna 4. 3. 2. 1. 2. Rear windowdefroster condensation removing and windows Defrosting iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage upper bodyregion with iDrive. can You adjustthe in also the temperature ature. turning the controller temper- toadjustthe Selectthefieldmoving the controller by and troller. and con- settings" Selectpress "Vent the "Climate". Open menu. start the Open ature. turning the controller temper- toadjustthe Selectthefieldmoving the controller by and side windows. side front and windshield the from tion Quickly removecondensa- iceand while. Depending on the vehicle a after offautomatically switches Thedefroster rearwindow 16 . load on load battery. displaythe the stays The same. the reduce to order in off switched is ventilation The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. > > > > > side: passenger's and driver's interior via various programs, separately for the vehicle the outinto flowing air the canroute You Manualdistribution air Air volume, manual iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage program. in this stored are settings Your individual program Adjusting airdistribution individually – Selecting program troller. Select the desired field by movingthe con- ger side is selected. repeatedlyuntil the driver's or front passen- the Move controller rightto the or left necessary. if side passenger front or driver's the Select side. left or right the on fields the with separately adjusted be The driver's and front passenger side can troller. and con- settings" Selectpress "Vent the "Climate". Open menu. start the Open Individual program footwell and windows side: Driver's Footwell Upper body region andfootwell region Upper body with the AUTO with thebutton. AUTO automatic mode for the air volume turning. the canreactivate You You air canadjustthe by volume the Control Display. on is respective program shown the desired air distribution of the Press the buttonrepeatedly until 99 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Climate cally with the AUTO program.cally with AUTO the coolingThe function is started. is engine the when briefly over fog Depending ontheweather, thewindshield may remove them. onthe tion window surfaces toquicklyor coolingThe function helps to avoid condensa- is running. This function is only available when the engine required, to according setting. temperature the 0 6. 5 4 Front passenger side: 3 2 1 Driver's side: effective with manual air distribution. air manual with effective remains volume thefor air mode automatic The Maximum cooling Maximum off Switching coolingfunction and on 6 tion. the air toadjustthe distribu- Turn controller Air to footwell Air for theupper body Air to footwell Air for theupper body windows Air directed toward the windshield and side andwith the engine running. manual air distribution air distribution manual settings. the thebutton cancels AUTO Pressing 100 before also reheating it as dehumidifiesthe incomingair and cools function cooling The eprtr bv prx 32 temperature above approx. outside an at possible as quickly as obtained is air cooled Maximally switched onautomati- switched < 7 / ously. ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu- over an extended period oftime, theas air qual- used be not should mode recirculated-air The increase the air volume if necessary. and mode recirculated-air the off switch > > > modes: three request operating By pressing thebutton repeatedly, you can matically. auto- shut-off the controls and air outside the pollutants operation, asensor detects in AUC air vehicle. currently During the the within lates supply of outside air. The system then recircu- > > lowing conditions are met: The function can be switched on when the fol- 2. 1. control/recirculated-air mode Automatic recirculated-airAUC Residual heat vents vents for maximum cooling. vents for the upper body. Therefore,open these mode. The maximum air volume flows out of the controlmate switchesinto recirculating air cli- temperature, automatic lowest At the the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. the mode: on,recirculated-air LED Left shuts off the supply as needed. pollutants and in outside detects air the the system mode: AUC on, LED Right in continuously. air flows off:outside LED with engine at operating temperature engine after switching offthe up to15 minutes Turn right,to the refer toarrow. engine. offthe Switch < buttonor AUTO the press mode, lated-air recircu-the in up fog windows the Should environment by suspending the unpleasant odors inthe immediate pollutants or to respond You can school topick upachild. partment, e.g. while ata stopped used to heat the passenger com- The heat stored in the engine is catapulted outwards toinjuries.catapulted lead and outwards set. the air volume and the air distribution can be From radio readiness the interior temperature, nand off on control climate automatic Switching > > you and is not directed straight at you. the outlets Set thatthe vent past so air flows Draft-free ventilation etc. toowarm, has become air in your direction, for instance, if the interior to Adjust ventthe outlets Ventilation for cooling 2 1 Front ventilation button ofthe climateautomatic control. any pressing by again system the on switch You 2. 1. 25 at an outside temperature below 77 below temperature at anoutside with batteryvoltage sufficient Levers to change tochange vent Levers directionthe outlet vent outlets close and open smoothly to wheels Knurled again. turn left second, tothe approx. 1 After Turn to the left to minimum air volume. vent outlets, otherwise these could be into notdrop objects foreign Do the any 6 direct ofcool the flow 7 < / 3 dard part of your scheduled maintenance. asastan- filter this replaces combined center air. pollutants the Youreous BMW from outside provides additional protection byfiltering gas- incoming the Theair. activated-charcoal filter from pollen and dust removes microfilter The Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 2 1 Rear ventilation between use. operation normal in recharged be to battery the allowing without succession in twice it vating electrical current, you should refrain from acti- Since the system uses a substantial amount of minutes. 30 for on switched It offdirectly. remains onand switched ventilation parked car to start. The be canalso system the for times different two set can You temperature. outside It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any peratures. interior tolower tem- compartment passenger The parked car ventilation blows air into the concept The Parked carventilation Levers to change tochange vent Levers directionthe outlet > > toadjustthe Knurled wheel temperature: vent outlets open close and tosmoothly wheel Knurled Turn toward red: warmer towardTurn blue: colder 101

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Climate The parked car ventilationisoperated via iDrive. outlets must be open for the system operate. to vent outlets inthe instrument panel. These vent The airemerges throughthe upper bodyregion 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for Switchingand on offdirectly 4. 3. 2. 1. Preselecting activationtimes climate control flashes. The symbol on display the on symbol ofthe The automatic the controller. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller. Select"Automatic ventilation" press and controller. Select"Parked car operation"press and the mate". controller the Move tothe left "Cli- to open Open the start menu. troller. Select "Activation time" and press the con- controller. Select"Parked car operation"press and the mate". controller the Move tothe left "Cli- to open Open the start menu. Theparked-car ventilation is switched on. 102 inciple refer topage 16 . climate control lights up. "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller. controller the Move tothe left rightor toselect Activating activation time 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. The symbol on display ofthe the on symbol The automatic last adjustment, the time is stored. is time the adjustment, last remaining the Make After adjustments. the selected. is setting next The controller toapply the the Press setting. Turn controller thethe tomake adjustment. firstThe is time setting selected. Select the time and press the controller. select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2". controller the Move tothe left right or to The activation The time is activated. 24 hours. Please reactivated it this hours. reactivated after time. Please 24 ventilation has switched on. climate control flashes when the parked car The display ofthe The onthe automatic symbol able for activation within the next next the within activation for able The parked car ventilation is only avail- < 103

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Practical interior accessories Controls, Inc. Johnson of trademark a registered is HomeLink www.homelink.com. www.bmwusa.com or Information is also provided on the Internet at: 1-800-355-3515. universal remote control. integrated the with compatible is it that assume ory buttons ory ofthe onone programmed can be three mem- transmitter hand-held original an of signal The transmitters. held hand- original the from signals stores and ters The integrated universal remote control regis- garage as such andgateorlighting systems. ters for various remote-controlled accessories, hand-held three transmit- as as many replace The integrated universal remote control can concept The control* universalremote Integrated Practical interior accessories Checking compatibility memory button question. The LED transmitter. ofthe original precautions safety hand-held ofthe with comply the range Also, device. the are travel within objects or ple, animals the immediateto area make certainthat no peo- inspect always control, remote universal grated topage refer safety, yourfor beforehand programs stored the delete Should yousell your vehicle oneday, be sure to signal. ofthe mission contact center your BMW orcall: If you have additional questions, please before programming or using the inte- To prevent possible damage orinjury, inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to inor the suppliedmanual with orig- the If you see this symbol on the packaging < 104 1 < . After this, the programmed this, . After programmed the 1 will operate the system in 2 105 flashes to confirm trans- toconfirm flashes . 4. 3. 2. 1. transmitters hand-held Fixed-code 2 1 Programming The corresponding memory button 5. hand-held transmitter. with the ofthe signal programmed original flashes slowly at asthe LED first. slowly As soon flashes LED The control. remote universal grated desiredthe button memory originalon the and hand-held transmitter button the press transmit Simultaneously 0cm from buttons memory the 30 in/ to12 cm in/10 ofapprox. distance 4 a at transmitter hand-held original the Hold are deleted. LED button left the andright-hand Press memory for first starting the time:operation When Switch on ignition, refer to page LED buttons Memory ory buttons ory mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4. 3and steps repeat mitters, other original hand-heldTo program trans- the step. repeat and distance the alter seconds, 15 LED release If rapidly, both flashes buttons. the used. ofthe hand-held tem transmitter original 2 2 < hand-held transmitter and the andthe hand-held transmitter mem- The required distance between the flashes quickly. All stored programs does not flash rapidly after approx. rapidly after notflash does 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the the until seconds 20 approx. for 1 depends on the relevant sys- relevant the on depends 1 on the onthe inte- 1 56 1 is now . . 2 2

ory buttons ory an alternating-code system, program the mem- of case the In system. alternating-code an uses original hand-held thatthe transmitter indicates this 2seconds, forapprox. lit remains then and remote control flashes rapidly for a short time control.If theLED button ter or hold down the programmed memory instructions for the original hand-held transmit- nating-code system. To do so, either read the alter- uses an hand-held transmitter original the running or whenthe ignition is switched on. You can operate the device when the engine is The corresponding button memory the following supplementary instructions: that employ an alternating code, please observe hand-held programming transmittersWhen tion. synchroniza- for possibilities the on there tion will equipment You the set. findto be informa- control, consult the operating instructions for remote the universal integrated To program transmitters hand-held Alternating-code 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. hand-held transmitters. hand-held transmitter. original the of signal the with programmed three times. control the remote universal integrated of Press the programmed memory button 5. step for seconds 30 approx. device have tobe 4,you step set. After Press the button on the receiver of the onthe drive unit. device tobe set, e.g. buttononthethe receiverLocate ofthe Fixed-code hand-held transmitters. control as described above in the section Program the integrated universal remote remote-controlled device. yourPark vehicle within rangethe of the repeated programming, check whether If the device fails after tofunction even Programming will be easier with the aid of of aid the with person. a second easier be will Programming 1 of of the integrated universal remote 1 at as described Alternating-code 2 on the integrated universal < < 1 is now now is 1

1. Rememorizing individual programs the Press andright-handleft button memory Deletingall storedprograms for approx. 20 seconds until the LED until seconds 20 approx. for Press the the Press driver'sbutton on the door. blindSun forrear window Sun blinds* 2. Individual programs cannot bedeleted. are All programs deleted. stored quickly: 3. ory buttons buttons the memory from away cm 30 10 to approx. control remote handheld original the Hold Press the desired memory the button Press memory desired used. ofthe tem original hand-held transmitter If the LED If the integrated universal remote. as the LED the as the hand-held Assoon transmitter. original of button the command press seconds, 20 buttons. If the LED buttons. and repeat the step. the repeat and the alter seconds, distance 15 after approx. please contact your BMWcenter. questions, additional you any If have < hand-held andthe transmitter mem- The required distancebetweenthe 1 . 2 2 flashes slowly after approx. after approx. slowly flashes 1 flashes rapidly, release both both rapidly, release flashes depends on the relevant sys- 2 does notflash rapidly 105 2 1 flashes flashes ofthe < 1

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Practical interior accessories ment cannot beunlocked. Glove compartment risk ofdamageandinjury athigher speeds. bracket. onto Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook blindsSunfor rearsidewindows parking, refer topage Lock with a key. Locking theRaise lid into closed the position. Closing use. close the glove compartment immediately after ment switches on. Pull the handle. The light in the glove compart- Opening < sun blind deployed. Otherwise, there is a with the the notopen Do window roller without the integrated key, for e.g. integrated valet without the If you only hand over the remote control dent while the vehicle is being driven, To prevent injury in the event of an acci- 106 28 , the glove compart- < < before inserting it in the socket. needed. ously. Pull the flashlight out of the socket when flashlightcontinu-The can remain pluggedin glove compartment. The flashlight is located on the left side of the Rechargeable flashlight cradle canbe removed for cleaning or a telephone that mat with a acompartment contains section Depending onvehicle equipment, the upper and can be folded upwards. somewhat button.The the cover Press opens Opening cover divided into twosections. in is the center armrest compartment The Center armrest, front alwaysensure that itis switched off To avoid possibly damaging the lamp, * . < Opening upper Opening upper compartment lation. push the slide downward to close off the venti- interior. of the rest the ventilatedhighercompartmentin than be may upward. Push the slide in the lower compartment Ventilating lower compartment* or cradle telephone the compartment upward. thePress buttonat frontthe andfold the upper Accessing lower compartment upward. buttonandfoldPress cover trol the inside setting, the temperature climate con- the automatic on Depending < Should this be the case, dent. there is an increased risk of injury in an acci- passenger footwell. > > over the vehicle's loudspeaker system: tracks play and audio player MP3 aCD or as You can connect an external audio device such forConnection external audio device intorest desired the position. arm- center ofthe section the illustrated Push Adjusting front seats, anet and seats, front the of backrests the on located are nets Storage ter andin console rear. the in are the located cen- compartments Storage compartments Storage USB/audio interface USB/audio topage connection,refer AUX-In < in the storage nets or or net, nets the in otherwise storage the objects sharp-edged or hard stow not Do * is provided in the front * , refer to page to refer , 107 168 169 . .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Practical interior accessories wise damage could result. that are too large into the cup holders, other- event ofanaccident. Do containersnot force erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the Clothes hooks gearshift frontIn of lever* cup holder. Press the cover in the center and push in the Closing Briefly press thebutton. Opening Cup holders vers. occupants during braking orevasive maneu- so,If youdo cause theycould personal injury to the hooks. on objects nothangheavy Do vision. dles in the rear. the han- grab arenear located hooks Clothes < and do not transport hot beverages. hotbeverages. donottransport Oth- and lightweight,Use unbreakable containers ensure that it will not obstruct the thatit notobstruct driver's will ensure hangingWhen clothing onthe hooks, 108 < Emptying Briefly press the center of the cover. Opening Ashtray, front* other areas could result in burns. back out. The lighter canbe removed as as soon it pops ignitionthe switched on. Press in the lighter with theengine running or Cigarette lighter, front* rises and can be removed. ashtray button,refer the toarrow. The Press the knobonly. the or Holding touching init orHold touchthe hotcigarette lighter by Ashtray, rear* example, usethe lighter burnthemselves. and leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for you control along take the Always when remote outlets in the vehicle. shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power different of plugs inserting to due socket Avoid V. the damaging at12 W approx. 200 cleaners, etc., ratingswith ofupto power power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum a as used can be lightercigarette socketthe on, ignition running the switched or engine the With Sockets Connecting electrical devices lighter, toCigarette Refer front. Cigaretterear lighter, and can be removed. rises ashtray The down. cover entire the Press Emptying < In the rear center console center rear the In Fold open the cover. socket: Access to frontIn passenger footwell Fold open the cover. socket: Access to bay cargo In Remove respective capor lighter. socket: Access to page a lighter. lighter, toCigarette front, Refer the rear are covered with caps or equipped with Depending on the equipment, the sockets in 108 . 109

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Practical interior accessories Center armrest, rear 1. Opening Through-loading system* arrow upward, cover the Pull tray: Storage 3. 2. Press button Press Access to cup holders: dow shelf. beltof the into fixture the onthe rear win- the rear and insert the latch plate at the end the Open buckle ofthe center safety belt in sponding lever in the cargo bay. corre- the pull backrest, rear the release To it topage will as as far go,refer down Push the corresponding head restraint 110 2 and openthe cover. 1 . 45 . to page to strapsfor securingsuitcases and luggage,refer with a way to attach cargo-bay nets cargo-bay attach to way a with The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you 2. the vehicle occupants. ing braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger could cargo enter thetransported vehicle dur- engages properly. If it is notproperly engaged, 1. Closing of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/2.10 m m ft/2.10 tract, reducing its overall capacity. 6.9 of skis When m. tocon- tend bagwill ski the length loaded, in are ft/2.10 6.9 to up of with alength skis canstow bagyou ski the With snow- 2 to up or boards. skis standard of pairs 4 to up of designedbag is clean transport forsafe, The ski bag* Ski 4. the latch plate audibly engages. buckle of the center safety belt. Make sure the rear window shelf and insert it into the on bracket the from the plate latch Release tion andengage. posi- seating the into rear backrest the Fold head restraint. head slightly.the backrest Foldforwardthe by The unlocked rearbackrest moves forward position, make sure sure catch that the make position, return you to its upright seat the When 117 . < * or luggage 1. Loading 4. 3. 2. edges to prevent damage. sharpskis clean Only stow Wrap intheski bag. button and open button andopen cover.the Fold down the center armrest, press the is marked CENTER. marked is intostrap the center safety belt buckle that Insert the platelatch ofthe ski bagretaining stowed items and drying of the ski bag. and fill it. zipper access The tothe facilitates seats front ski the the bag between Extend cover in the cargo bay. the opens first also firmly this the time, cargo bay Ifopens. youpress the button the Press the button again; in the cover variousitems equipment. of Removing ski bag ski Removing reverse order. To store theski bag,performthe steps above in pants during braking orevasive maneuvers. sioning buckle forthis purpose. Tighten retaining tents. the onthe strap ten- con- its and bag ski the secure loading, After cargo Securing 2. 1. uses. dryingfaster toallow toputitor you toother cancomple beThe ski bag Close the cover the bay. in cargo up and out. bag ski the pull and forward handle the Pull you withyou onthe moreinformation detailed Your BMW center will beglad to provide do so, it could endanger vehicle occu- Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to 111 tely removed, e.g. for < <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Driving tips

This section is designed to provide you with extra support by supplying information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions. Things to remember when driving break-in, refer toDrivelogic on page 6 during and 5 the notuse Do driving programs ing section. careful devote tothethat you attention follow- throughout extended an servicelife, werequest to ues optimizedprovide of economy operation each other. Toensure that your vehicle contin- need breaking-in parts Moving time to adjust to Break-in period whendriving remember Things to is 0 ie/0 km. miles/300 200 first period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the break-in initial an after until potential tion manufacture, tires doachieve not their fulltrac- with their totechnical associated factors Due Tires this time. during rpm of 5,500 speeds engine notexceed Do km. miles/500 300 approx. optimized level after driving a distance of functionThe transm ofthe Transmission briefly, e.g. when passing. km/h.Only drive attopspeed mph/220 135 increased uptoa continuous vehicle speed of The engine and driving speed can gradually be km miles/5,000 3,000 km to miles/2,000 From 1,200 initial miles. transmission's kick-down modeduring these Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the km/h. 170 mph/ however do not exceed 5,500 rpmor 105 Drive at changing engine and driving speeds, km miles/2,000 Up to1,200 limits. speed all official obey Always differential and Engine 114 ission is only at its its at only is ission 61 . between the hot exhaust system and any highly andany system the hotexhaust between contact avoid possible to care parking take them. Whendriving, standing at idle and while adjacent toit, undercoating never to and apply heat installed the notremove Do shields tem. 2. 1. gage compartment lid open: todrive with lug- the necessary isIf it absolutely compartment. into passenger the trate closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could pene- after subsequent driving operation. be replacedmust above mentioned ponents Observe the break-in instructions again if com- Following part replacement gently. During this break-in period, engagethe clutch transmission: manual With km. miles/500 300 driven ofapprox. after adistance level mized functionThe clutch ofthe is only opti- atits Clutch this break-in period. and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during contact and wear patterns between brakepads to achieve km optimized miles/500 approx. 300 of period break-in initial an require Brakes system Brake Hot exhaust system Closing luggage compartment lid General driving notes page controlmate toa high refer level, to cli- automatic the of airtheIncrease volume Close all windows and the glass sunroof. aturesare generatedexhaust the on sys- inAs all vehicles, extremely high temper- lid is compartment gage completely Operate the vehicle only when the lug- 99 . < transmission may bedamaged. cle's engine, the electrical systems and the walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi- ability to steer and brake the vehicle. road the surface, ultimately undermining your and tires the between contact of loss complete apartial is characterized planing, or by and toashydro- referred is This face. phenomenon sur- tires androad between of water form can mum tire tread on page Mini- to also refer decreases, tires the of depth The risk hydroplaning of increases as the tread Hydroplaning pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns. injury. nottouch personal tail Do hot exhaust well as riskas the ofserious damage property and fire,it withto a lead couldetc. Suchcontact grass, leaves, hay, as such materials flammable brake wear and possibly even brake failure. pedal pressure can lead tohigh temperatures, and operating safety of the brake system. however, have not effect on the performance brake rotors can cause operating noises which, perforated the In braking situations certain braking. controlling is ABS The pulsing ofhe brake pedal indicates thatthe effort. possible obstacles with a minimum of steering steering responsiveness, you can still avoid brake withfull force.Since the vehiclemaintains to best is it it, require that situations In feature. astandard as ABS equipped is with BMW Your safely Braking Driving through water sdee hn1ft/30cm, and then onlyat is deeper1 than drive if road onthe not water it through Do reduce road speed. If you donot, a wedge drivingWhen or roads, onwet slushy brake pedal. Evenlight but consistent the resting on foot yournot drive with Do 202 . < < < < of the pedals and impair their operation. movement into area toprotrude the objects of any or other floorcarpets mats, allow Never and steering. braking actionor support ofthebraking force will noengine there be off,otherwise switched clutch depressed, in idle orwith the engine donotdrive the with transmission: Manual ing. action or support ofthe braking and force steer- will there off, otherwise noengine be braking possibly even brake failure. brake even possibly wear and brake leadcan tohigh temperatures, light butconsistent pressure onthe brakepedal whichgear inleast braking the is required.Even the in gradients downhill steep or long drive Hills when you need it. fullbrakingthat efficiencywill thenbeavailable to ensure rotors and pads the dry helps process other road users. Theheat generated in this ensure that this maneuver does not endanger every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, Drivingin wet conditions cure. effect that evenextended application will fail to will brakes to respond tend with a pulsating Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the not reached. during brake applications theto clean rotors is pressure which must beexerted bythe pads occursbecause Thisbrake pads. theminimum onthe accumulate while contaminants rotors, increased tendency for corrosion to form on brake applications are less frequent, there is an atall,used in where and conditions operating during extended periods when the vehicle is not When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, Corrosion on brake rotors drive in idle or with the engine switched switched engine the with or idle in drive not do Manual Transmission: Sequential reduced efficiencyreduced brake the system, of To prevent overheating and the resulting 115 < <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Things to remember when driving aged. can assume the form of a sudden blow-out. ofasudden the form assume can inside thedevelops tires. ultimate resultThe damage at which rate the increases and heating load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- tronic DampingControl, refer topage select the "Sport" program of the EDC Elec- ble. Otherwise the vehicle may bedamaged. keep the ground clearance as uniform as possi- for your vehicle brochure. nance ofyour BMWis contained in the Caring mainte- and care the on information General vehicle. the width of otherwise they could be damaged duetothe Fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page wash car a into driving Before vehicletherefore are normal. vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the tem during operation, and then exits under the Condensation forms in the air conditioner sys- parked is vehicle When Cargo loading clearance Ground < bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam- cargo the in leak fluids no that sure Make approved carrying capacity, never over- To loading avoid tires beyond the their isance available. Todrive down curbs, thatsufficient sure Make clear-ground 116 82 , to 48 < , < 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Determining loadinglimit load capacity of your vehicle. may reduce the available cargo and luggage this how determine to trailer a transporting to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transferred be trailer will your from load the If yourvehicletrailer,towing abe will part of 4. in step cargo andluggage loadcapacitycalculated weight may not safely exceed the available and cargobeingloaded the vehicle. on That Determine the combined weight of luggage lbs. =650 lbs. 750 lbs. minus 1,400 lbs.: 650 able cargo and luggage load capacity is avail- of amount the vehicle, your in sengers pas- 150-lb. five be will there and lbs. 1,400 For example, if the XXX amount equals capacity. of cargoandluggageload amount available the equals figure resulting The kg. lbs. or YYY and passengers from XXX Subtractcombined the weightthe of driver your vehicle. in riding be will that passengers and driver Determine the combined weight of the result.ditions may may bedamaged and unstable driving con- kg, as otherwise the vehicle lbs. or YYY XXX vehicle's placard Locate the following statement on your and cargo should never exceed The combined weight of occupants * : < Load > > > > cargo Stowing can be transported. ofoccupants, weight occupants and cargo/lu of weight the of total the is load permissible The of the of the backrest. not Do higherpile objects thanthe topedge opposite buckle. not occupied, secure each safety belt in the For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is corners.and edges Cover sharp rear backrest. as possible, placing it directly behind the low as and forward far as cargo heavy Load the less cargo/luggage ggage. Thegreater the to thevehicle's occupant hazard asafety pose around and fly could they as compartment, in passenger the objects hard You should nevertransport unsecuredheavyor laws. safety oftraffic tion viola- you place in and also may hazard, safety to page weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle vehicle could be damaged. cargo straps could become detached orthe cargo straps, refer to illustration, otherwise the Use onlythelashing eyes secure to heavy-duty sary. den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces- ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud- ing or evasive maneuvers. > > > cargo Securing supplied with the straps. heavy-duty cargo Please observe the special instructions illustration. to refer straps, cargo heavy-duty these secure in to aremounted the bay used cargo your BMWcenter. Four lashing eyes at available are objects heavier and larger Heavy-duty cargo straps lightweight luggage andcargo. and small down tohold straps securing Use theluggage net describeditcannot that so above, endan- as the andsecure cargo Position 232 , as, excessive loads canpose a * s during abrupt brak- 117 , luggage straps, or < * for securing

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Things to remember when driving Mounting points included installationtions with instructions. the for your BMW. Please comply with the precau- A special rack system is available as an option Roof-mounted luggage rack* braking maneuvers. Takecorners gently. and sudden smoothly. Avoid Drive acceleration during the trip. off falling or shifting from it prevent to securely Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and ment lid. the into opening path of luggagethe compart- donot andthatobjects sunroof, project glass adequateclearance is maintained for raising the pieces that Be onthe sure heaviest bottom. not stow the too in large Always be area. must the uniformly. load loadDistribute roof The Weights onpage You can find the specified weights under rack. the loading when loads axle the or weight vehicle gross approved exceed the approved roof load capacity, the You should therefore always remember not to its handling and steering response. on effect major a have they loaded, when gravity Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of Loading roof-mounted luggagerack openings. located in are mounting door The points the 118 232 . perature onpage V10 High Output Engine BMW M5Engineering to Tachometer page to on For additional information of warming up, refer design. tem sys- the to due undertone metallic slightly a has When the engine is cold, the exhaust system warm-up phase. its during characteristics running rougher slightly have to engine high-output V10 The emissions control system causes the Warming up rpm. 7000 the maximum engine speed is limited to engine dynamics, when the vehicle is at rest, engine.to protect Due tothe the powerful fuelinterrupted is in order flow rpm, of the 8250 of speed engine maximum the At range. speed engine usable broad a very yield characteristics response Its spontaneous Nm. ft/520 lb 384 kW and a maximum torque of put of 373 engine generates a maximum out- speed V10 cu liter in/5 a305 With displacement, the high- 67 . 66 and Engine and oil tem- operating safety, and stability of the ofthe stability and brakes. safety, operating ing, but thisnoeffect has performance, onthe brake rotors,function noises occurduring brak- rotors. Due to the special structural brake features of these compound perforated with system Your has BMW M5 a high-performance brake Compound brake nents. functionthe or service compo- life the ofthe tinctly audible. This does impair notin way any sports car. As result,a load shifts can be dis- in a as customary is audible, also is torque the of transmission the train, drive the of design drive to the Due tothe torsionally system. rigid tothe direct attached connection ofthe engine In your BMWM5, particular importance was Drive train page Also refer to Corrosion on brake rotors on of the vehicle. regular intervals accordance within the nature at load under them put to useful is it condition, In order to keep the brake system in optimum Braking correctly 115 . 119

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Navigation

This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination. Starting navigation system Navigation DVD enter. and guide you reliably anyto destination you ascertain the precise position yourof vehicle to satellites canuse system Your navigation system navigation Starting 1. DVD navigation Removing 2. 1. Inserting navigation DVD your center. BMW gation DVD. Thelatest version is available at The navigation system requires a special navi- also shown on the Control onthe shown Control Display. also is message a case this In blocked. is it that sible If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos- 2. Press Press button the datafrom DVD. scan the to system the for seconds several Allow cally pulled in. up. is automati- side navigation DVD The labeled the with DVD navigation the Insert Remove the DVD. drive. the from slightly emerges DVD The 122 1 . 4. 3. 2. 1. tion. visible even if you changetoanother applica- remains display This window. assistance the in You can display the route or the current position Display in assistance window 3. 2. 1. displayed. briefly is view arrow the direction, of achange suggests system navigation the If Displayingview arrowmap in view* Press the controller. position". Select the desired route view or "Current Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. window. assistance the Move controller tothe right to enter the selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press * window. 6. 5. 4. The arrow view appears in the assistance assistance in the appears view The arrow and press the controller. instructions" pop-up display "Arrow Select press the controller. and selected is "Languages" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the is selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" 123

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry > > shows: Display Control The 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for and other road users. tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants this Ifyou donotobserve precau- system. tion naviga- the by issued instructions the and tions contradiction between traffic condi- androad ofany the in event traffic regulations applicable > buttons, referbuttons, topage the programmable memory/direct selection on anavigation destination also store can You page to refer guidance, the destination start to ceed After selecting your destination you can pro- > > > > > the followingamong options: In entering your destination you can select from Destination entry ance is switched off switched is ance guid- destination when list destination the guidancetion the arrow view ormapview during destina- ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select "Navigation". button. controller the Move tothe right toopen This opens the start menu. the Press Selecting home address, refer topage refer to page Selecting destinationfrom addressbook, Destination list,page Selecting destination from list,a refer to refer to page Selecting destination using information, page Entering destination via voice*, refer to below see manually, adestination Entering 136 tionary, and always give give always tionary, priorityand tothe dataonlyvehiclethe when Enter is sta- 127 . 124 131 129 < 21 inciple refer topage . 130 133 16 . > > ing features: follow- the with you supports also system The 3. 2. 1. called upquickly. be can names stored that so automatically entry your completes and spellings different enter page to refer towns, easier for you to enter the names of streets or The system'swordmatching principle makes it manually destinationEntering a for your new destination. ity the be if current should retained entries You can skip the entry of country and local- city. ofatown/ area totheguide you downtown If you do not enter a street, the system will troller. con- the press and address" "Enter Select Press the controller. "New destination" is selected. press the controller. and selected is "Navigation" until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe 135 . This allows to allows you . This its zip code bemust entered. ance, theat of least town/city destination orthe guid-destination the start to able be to In order 2. 1. Selecting country 3. 2. 1. name Entering destinationtown/city via the controller. Select the country of destination and press display. the on appears countries ofavailable The list country and press the controller. displayed the or Province" / "State Select > > theTo delete entered letter necessary:if Control onthe Display. ter appears starting with let-A list this of all towns/cities ler. Select the letter control- starting andpress city the andpress controller. /City" Select "Town the or town/ displayed select and press and hold the hold press and the and con- troller. select theMove the controller toward right to and press the controller. orDelete all letters: numbers select theMove the controller toward right to Delete individual numbers letters: or 2. 1. Entering destination byzip code 5. 4. troller. Select thedesiredpress digits and thecon- Enter zip the code: ler. control- /City" the Select "Town press and the controller. city name is selected from the listand press essary. Turn the controller until the town/ totheChange third field from topif the nec- > enter newyou letter. a The list gradually grows smaller eachtime more letters. If enter necessary, troller. symbol and press the con- Select the Enterblank spacenecessary: if 125

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry 4. 3. entered country are offered for selection. selection. for offered are country entered ofthe all streets In case this destination. a astreet canalso enter without You entering destination a street withoutEntering entering 2. 1. Entering street and intersection tion or the house number. intersec- enter the canalso you street the After intersection and number house street, Entering the street. the intersectionThe in is entered way the as same selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until the destination is into Change thirdthe field the from top. The corresponding destination is displayed. Select thezip codean > > > nation. The street is entered exactly like the desti- Enter the street. press the controller. Select "Street" or the displayed street and select and press and hold the con- the hold and press and troller. select theMove controller the toward right to and press the controller. Delete allor numbers letters: select theMove controller the toward right to Delete individual numbers or letters: troller. symbol and press the con- Select the space: Enter ablank 126 d press the controller. 3. 2. 1. navigation DVD can be entered. All house numbers stored for the street on the number house Entering 3. 2. 1. anothertown/city.part the of tination, because, forexample, it belongs to des- entered the exist in not does street desired undo this entry. This practical be may the if can you been entered, already has atown/city If street name. town/city related is displayed after the The is selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until the house number into Change thirdthe thefield from top. troller. Select the desireddigitspress and thecon- Enter the house number: troller. con- the press and number" "House Select enter the street. top and thefrom field the second to Change try appears and press thecontroller. requestthe for street entry a of inthe coun- Turn controllerthe tothe right until the Change toupper field. The arrow is selected. is arrow The manual destination entry Starting destination guidance with pose if necessary. if pose function the command thisvate for voice pur- Reacti- time. any at iDrive and command voice destination, it is possible tochangebetween voice system. command When enteringthe You can enter a desired destination via the voice* Entering destination via > > 1. list, refer topage list, refer The destinationis stored destinationin the the controller. press and list" todestination "Add Select be started immediately: If the destination guidance does not need to Destination guidance starts immediately. troller. con- the press and guidance" "Start Select rs h button thesteering on wheel. Press the 2. commands read aloud. read commands With { Enter address { Options } youcan have thepossible 130 } . < pauses. exce volume, avoiding and Pronounce letters smoothly the at normal countryorthography ofthe ofdestination. To enter the destination, spell it using the Spelling destination entire word. The destination can be spelled or entered as an Entering destination the language of the voice command system. the Say of countryname the ofdestination in 1. Selecting country trol Display. entries are displayed at once on the Con- 6 your Upto thatmatch entries. tions to20destina- up suggest can system The destination. for country of toask the for system Wait the 2. A destination is suggested by the system. 1. 2. > > > > > Select town/city: town/city. the the more exactlythe system recognizes destination. Themore letters you say, atleast firstSay ofthethe letters three Spell town/city name: tion. of destina- countrythe of name the Say To respell the town/city: { list: the in entries other show To Select entry,e.g. Selecttown/city: other Select highlightedtown/city: Next page ssive emphasis and and emphasis ssive } 127 { Entry 3 Entry { No { Repeat } } { Yes } }

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry selected and press the controller. theTurn controller until the destination is via iDrive: The town/city can also beselected from the list 1. excessiveemphasis pauses. and Speak smoothly and atnormal volume, avoiding word, the system language must beEnglish. entire an as destination a US enter to Example: is tem can spoken enteredbe asanentire word. where the language of the voice sys- command Towns/cities and streets located in the region word* Entering the destination as an entire a destination followed by three dots. dots. three by followed destination a as shown and list separate a in summarized are selected and press the controller. theTurn controller until the destination is via iDrive: The town/city can also beselected from the list tions that match your thatmatch entries. tions to6destina- up suggest can system The tion. the the for Wait to system request destina- 2. 3. system. the by suggested is destination A cannot differentiated cannot be by system the which same the sound that Destinations > > > > Say the name the name destination. the Say of > Select town/city: { theTo enter spelling: town/city by To reenter the town/city: town/city: To reenter the Select entry, e.g. Select other town/city: town/city: other Select Select highlighted town/city: town/city: highlighted Select 128 Spell } { Entry 3 { No { } Repeat } { Yes } } or can be canbe or in book. address stored the The destination is added tothe destination list Saving destination immediately. guidance starts Destination Starting destination guidance Say the house number as individual numbers. canbe numbers house Up to entered. 4-digit number:house enter the To destination. The street is entered in the same way as the Entering street and house number 2. 1. adoptit then the into destination guidance. toselectdestinationcursor the map and onthe destination by using a map. You can use the ofthe youstreet destination, then the canenter If you locationonly the know ofthe town/city or selection Map-guided destination select town/city thisselect list. desired the from Select this entry with Press the controller. "New destination" is selected. ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select { { { 2. 1. Add toaddress book Add to destination list destination to Add guidance Start Say the house number. { House number } { Yes } } } } ifnecessary. Then or < 6. 5. 4. 3. > > Select the desired menu item: items are displayed. The selected destination and other menu troller. tination con- press the guidance system, des- the in destination the store or adopt To > > cursor. with destination Select > > trol Display: Con- the on displayed is map a of section A Select "Input andpressmap" the controller. rent position in center ofthethe map. current "Show the places position" cur- guidance. route starts "Start destination guidance" right, forward and back. and forward right, The controller can be moved to the left, corresponding direction. Moving map: move the controller in the Changing scale: theturn controller. entered destination last the around vated, With the destination guidance deacti- destination current During destination guidance, around the 3. 2. 1. intothem destination the guidance. and adopt hospitals, or sights hotels, e.g. tions, You can obtain a display of selected destina- information Selecting destination using eette symbol and press the controller. Select the displayed in themap display: The map for the destination entry can also be 7. > > > location: Select ler. control- the press and "Information" Select ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select Press the controller. > > > "On a new destination" "On location" "On destination" "Input map". tomap""Return changes backtothe map. current destination in the center of the the places position" destination "Show Exit the menu. 129

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry 9. 7. 6. 5. 4. 8. > > > Select the desired menuitem: Control Display. These destinations are displayed onthe troller. the con- press and search>" " troller. con- the andpress symbol Select the anew search: To start 124 . turn controller. the tination list: To display additional destinations from thedes- tion during destination guide. list. destination the in item first isthe entered destination last The controller. the press and "Navigation" Select 2. 1. Editing destination list 2. 1. systemguidance Applying destination in destination > > > The selected destinationedited:can be controller. the press and list nation Select the desired destination in the desti- troller. con- the press and guidance" "Start Select the controller. Select the desired destination and press This symbol indicates the current destina- Select "Delete entry". Delete entry: Select ondestination". "Information Display information on destination: Select toaddress"Add book". Store entry: Select "Address book" and press the controller. the press and book" "Address Select iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage Opening address book Address book 3. 2. 1. address book. destinations 100 thein can You approx. store Storing destinationsaddress in book 3. troller. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller. Selectaddress""New presscon- and the troller. con- the press and book" "Address Select Press the controller. > > page name, town/city via destination Entering Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Change entry: guidance is switched off. Select "Delete list".destinationThe all entries: Delete 125 . 131 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry page to list book,refer nation in address the You can also store a destination from the desti- 5. 4. enter a name. In the by DVD. you thisnavigation case, must book ifaddress you have left the sector covered your enter the position current canalso into You 4. Storing current position* current Storing 2. 1. address book. currentThe the canbe into position adopted 3. The entry is stored in the address book. the controller. Select "Store in address and book" press page manually, Entering adestination Entername and address, alsorefer to the controller. Select "Store in address and book" press selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "New address" is into Change thirdthe field the from top. troller. Select "Address book" and press thecon- ally, page manu- destination a Entering refer to ation, The namegiven canbe changed.For oper- and press the controller. Select "Use current location address"as 130 . 132 124 . 124 . ler. Select "Start guidance" and press the control- guidance: destination the start To 2. 1. book Selecting destinations from address 3. 2. 1. book Changing destinationsfrom address Select the entry and press the controller. Display. The stored entries appear on the Control troller. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller. con- address""Edit press the Select and Select the entry and press the controller. troller. Select "Address book" and press the con- 3. 2. 1. address book Deletingindividual destinations from 5. 4. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. book Deletingall destinations from address 4. troller. Select"Deleteaddress" presscon- and the Select the the entry andpress controller. troller. con- the press and book" "Address Select the controller. Select "Store in address and press book" page manually, tion operation,For refer destina- Entering to a Change entry. press the controller. controller until "Delete data" is selected and Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open Select "Yes" and press the controller. 124 . 4. 3. 2. 1. inposition the address book. address book. This entry occupies the second rent destination as the home address in the can You your store current position cur- the or Storing home address 2. 1. Changing home address 2. 1. Adopting homeaddress as destination 7. 6. the controller. Select "Store in address and press book" controller.guidance, the press and nation "Save current destination"during the desti- Select "Use current location as address", or selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Home address" is into thirdChange the the field from top. troller. con- the press and book" "Address Select destination manually, page a refer operation, troller. For to Entering Select "Edit address" and press thecon- troller. Selectaddress""Home presscon- and the troller. con- the press and guidance" "Start Select troller. Selectaddress""Home presscon- and the Select "Yes" and press the controller. controller. Select "Delete address book" and press the 133 124 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry experience. that onpersonal based ones would you choose same the be always not may system navigation a result, the routes recommended by the As onthe are DVD. stored navigation types road it awinding The or road. is ahighway whether typeThe into of is taken road account,e.g. The route is planned according tofixed rules. guidance tination is active. entering the destinationwhenever and the des- the route criteria as often as you like while choosing certain route criteria. You can change You can influence the calculated route by Selecting route 3. 2. 1. Changing route criteria > > > > Select a route criterion for the route: Display. The various criteria are listed on the Control is selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Routepreference" into Change thirdthe field the from top. ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select slow progress be progress will slow or Short fast irrespective ofhow route, route" "Short roads the fastest nation of the shortest possible route and time,The being acombi- traveling short route" "Fast Freeways are avoided where possible highways" "Avoid given priority are arteries traffic major and Freeways "With highways" 134 increase considerably. can route the for time calculation the selected, 2. 1. arrow or map view: The route criteria can also bechanged in the To exit the menu: 5. 4. Select the arrow and press the controller. troller. Select a route criterion and press the con- press the controller. Select the symbol for the route criterion and > > > terion andthen press controller:the If necessary, select an additional route cri- Press the controller. "Avoid tollroads""Avoid "Avoid or ferries" are If the route criteria "Avoid highways", Ferries are avoided where possible. ferries" "Avoid Tollroads are avoided where possible. tollroads" "Avoid traffic obstruction. calculated thatitso through passes the traffic obstruction, theroute can also be the extent of and kind the and type road of traffic Depending obstructions. on case in route the of changing Automatic "Dynamic route"* Theroute criterion is selected. < > > > include: fits bene- user The response. instant for basis the DVD ontheas navigation datastored with the entries destination your comparing checks, of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing names the toenter you it for easier ple to make princi- matching word the supports system The Word matching principle non existent names andaddresses. navigationsystem DVD. The will accept not onthe beginning with stored letters thatare The system only accepts name entries tion. available toensure unambiguous identifica- are letters assoon enough automatically and streets the system will complete them When you are entering the namesof towns "Monaco". spelling the English spelling "Munich" orthe Italian Instead of "München", you can also enter Example: try. coun- another in customary is that spelling from the official versions if you are using a vary also can locations ofspecific Names 135

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for Via iDrive guidance Starting destination Destination guidance be punctually notified ofachangedirection will You time. iDriveatany via equipment other symbol and press the controller. During destination guidance, you can operate Select the the arrow or map view: in started also be can guidance destination The play on the Control Display. guidance is indicated by arrows or dis-a map Afterbeen theroutehas calculated, destination troller. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- topage tination, refer and press the controller or enter a new des- list destination the from destination a Select press the controller. and selected is "Navigation" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe 136 inciple refer topage 124 . 16 . 1. tion. eette symbol and press the controller. Select the In arrow or map display terminating/continuing Destination guidance, onwhich the button ... page to refer Also stored. is destination desired the Press buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ In destination list direction arrow. ofthe display the and instructions spoken by controller. Select the current destination and press the This symbol indicates the indicates destina- current This symbol 22 . 2. 2. 1. Displayingdisplay arrow page ofmenu opening items, to Comfort refer of the route during destination guidance. You have the option of displaying various views Displaying route Select"Yes" presscontroller. and the guidance: destination the start To ashort time. after The destination guidance starts automatically guidance todestination?"."Continue displayed before beginning the next trip: is question following the destination, entered When you park the vehicle before reaching the the controller. Select "Zielführung beenden" andpress selected and press the controller. is display" "Arrow until controller the Turn intoChange fourth the field from top. the ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select 18 directly tothe screen last displayed, another you From menu, can change . < of the arrow changes. arrow of the Before a change in direction, the representation Control Display. the lineof bottom or top the in displayed are tion time of arrival andthe tothe distance destina- Depending on the equipment, the estimated 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 > > Direction of travel position Current change directionnext of Distance the to view eye bird's a from destination to Arrow Starting/ending destination guidance criteria route Selecting Manually displaying traffic information traffic displaying Manually on/off instructions voice Switching shown. is display arrow The ture. navigation DVD, e.g. in aparking struc- onthe contained anarea located in not is from a bird's eye view when the vehicle Arrow shows the route to becalculated Solid arrow: route. onthe guidance calculated Destination Outline arrow: 137 *

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance To To exit the menu: 3 2 1 2. 1. plannedthe route onthe is shown map. After the starting guidance, destination a map. havecurrent yourYou can position displayed on Displaying map view Select the arrow and press the controller. Change of direction Distance up tochangeofdirection Street name for change of direction > > > view is selected: Turn controllerthe until the map desired into Change fourth the field from top. the ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select "Perspective" oftravel" direction "Map north" facing "Map 138 The next map display is displayed. controller. the andpress symbol the corresponding Select Turn the controllerTurn scale. toadjust the scale Changing Changing map display toward points always north. map greater, the or km miles/500 of Atscales oftravel. 250 tion map tonorth the your toward or current direc- option the have of deciding whether toorient you km, miles/500 scalesAt less of than250 To exit the menu: Display. Control the of in line shown the destinationto the are bottom time ofarrival estimated The distanceand the 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3. Select the arrow and press the controller.

Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view eye abird's from todestination Arrow Manually displaying traffic information Changing route criteria > > > Changing mapdisplay onpage tion informa- via destination Selecting to refer displayed/hidden, be can selected last tion informa- the which in menu the Displaying Map-guided destinationselection Starting/ending destinationguidance on/off instructions voice Switching Press the controller. "Map direction of direction travel" "Map "Map facing "Map north" "Perspective" 129 * 2. 1. displayed. are also road individual The distances remaining to be traveled on each route displayed during destination guidance. the along towns and roads can the have You route Displayingtowns/cities streetsandof eette symbol and press the controller. Select the view: can be on switched offin or map arrow or the instructions voice guidance, destination During Switching voice instructions on/off voice instructions via Destination guidance To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press controller.the selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is list" "Route into thirdChange the the field from top. ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select rentlyuse in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. time: any To switch the voice instructions on and off at The voice instructions are switched on. switched are instructions voice The press the controller. and instructions" voice "Navigation Select press the controller. and selected is "Languages" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the selectedis presscontroller. and the Turn the controller until "Language / Units" selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press * . 139

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance > > refer topage wheel you can also make the following settings, theWith steering button programmable on the instructions cancelingRepeating and voice travel before returning to the original returning tothe original route. before travel to want you that miles/kilometers of number the Enter road. of stretches particular avoid to recommendations route system's navigation the revise can you guidance, destination During sections routeBypassing 2. 1. instruction is being output. The volume can only beadjusted while a voice instructions voice of volume Setting rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- sources. audio This volumeindependent is the of volumeof the Press button longer. button Press Switchvoice instructions on/off: button. Press Repeat the voice instruction: to select to select volume. desired the Turn the knob during the voice instruction sary. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces- 140 50 : iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for information on/off Switching receptionof traffic list. info traffic information displayed in the map view or in the is active or ance the canhave not, you traffic guid- destination Whether displayed. matically toyour relevant mation planned isroute auto- infor- traffic the guidance, destination During is periodically updated. centersmanagement andthetraffic information trafficThe conditions monitored by are traffic stations. by transmitted radio fic information In many congested areas, Traffic information* 2. 1. route: theTo withoutexit from changing menu the recalculated. is route The 3. 2. 1. Select the arrow and press the controller. rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press number and press the controller. Turn controllerthe toenter the desired controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "New route" is into Change thirdthe thefield from top. ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select inciple refer topage you can receive traf- 16 . 3. 4. other informationdisplayed. is station with reception. strongest the Info Traffic ofthe selection automatic "AUTO": displayed. 5. The traffic information can can and received The be traffic information selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" tings" is selected and press the controller. set- Info "Traffic until controller the Turn ler. Select "Traffic Info" and press thecontrol- tion name, frequency, local number or or local number name, frequency, tion Depending on the station, either the sta- < to the currentto the vehicle position. route is shown sorted according to the distance First trafficthe information the along planned diamond. yellow mation on the planned route is marked with a the traffic infor- guidance, destination During controller. the press and symbol the Select fic traf- information border, with ared is shown symbol is available for the planned route. If the can be displayed in the arrow or map view. traffic information destination guidance, During During destination guidance Manually displayingtraffic information 2. 1. With destination guidance switchedoff "Navigation". the Move controller rightto the toopen menu. start the Open 141

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance 3. to currentto the vehicle position. route is shown sorted according to the distance the First the along traffic information planned To To exit fromthe menu: presscontroller. the Select a traffic information item from the list and Displaying detailed traffic information functionscaleselected. the of dent are displayed and hidden. This occurs as a report as well as the number for the type of inci- The section of the route affected by a traffic km. miles/200 the map view up to a scale of 100 in shown are symbols information traffic The view Depiction oftraffic informationmap in Select the arrow and press the controller. ler. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- 142 Symbols fortrafficinformation Accident Uneven surface Icy roads traffic Stopped up back Traffic traffic Slow Road close Smog Cross winds Slippery road Heavy rain Fog No parking Low clearance Danger Vehicle onwrong carriage way load ofhazardous Transport General traffic obstruction Roadwork failure light Traffic displayindividually. these received. Select a smaller scale to Several traffic events have been the direction of travel concerned. than 5miles/10km, greater scales with map event Traffic arrow points in shortly before shortly before this. displayed be will junction possible last The e.g. km, length the ofthe traffic jam. 40 miles/ 25 adistance from ofapprox. mation selected,will youprovided be with certaininfor- tion system and"Dynamic route" is not If atraffic obstruction is reported naviga- to the Displaying trafficobstructions whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected. on depending vary will response System guidance Traffic information during destination Police checkpoint Delay Lane closure travel of directions both in event Traffic Stopped traffic Stop-and-go traffic Slow trafficother or event may leadmay through trafficthe obstruction. trafficof the obstruction, the routecalculated and extent the kindDependingroad typeand on along out traffic original obstructions route. the point not does system The obstruction. traffic will changed be in automatically eventthe of a When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route planning route Dynamic 2. 1. off. switched even when the destination guidance is You can have your current position displayed Displaying current position Display. called up a different application on the Control have you if displayed also is information This is selectedis presscontroller. and the Turn controller the until "Current position" intoChange fourth the field top. the from ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select 143

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance played on a map, refer to page referto map, a played on the canalso have You position current dis- To exit the menu: appear. town/city, your current map coordinates will unable is toidentify a system If the navigation The current position of your BMWis displayed. Select the arrow and press the controller. 144 138 . > > > > > … if do to What to doif… What that is as close as possible tothe original. aspossible asclose is that ters to choose from. Select a destination will let- any notoffer you the case, system thatis the In DVD navigation loaded. this destination on dataofthe The is notstored letters select the your entry? for desired tination butit guidance, is notpossible to des- the for destination a enter to want you ance. andthentown, destination start the guid- such as the railway station in the selected adestination street, Enter or any entered. for can be city or the determined town area navigation nodowntown On the DVD, street name? without the an address not accept does guidance the destination original. the to as possible as is close that destination thatis Selectthe a DVD navigation loaded. destination on dataofthe The is notstored destination? the destinationaccept guidancea does not sky. tothe view unobstructed tion. Reception is best when youhave an is in the process of calculating your posi- system the or DVD, navigation your on able your is avail- position obstructions, notyet to due position current at your signals GPS The system is unable to receive enough play? vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis- requestyou the current position of your is mation indicated onthe label.DVD This infor- navigation system. for the DVD The navigation not DVD may be the correct trol Display? onthe Con- appears tion DVD the to insert a navigation DVDis inserted, but instruc- an > > again operational. again is once system before the minutes about 10 takes it disconnected, was battery If the entries? to not react does the system navigation route. anew recommended calculate and the system requires a few seconds to Or youhave left the recommended route the general direction of turn, you will see an arrow which indicates a indicating ofanarrow Instead tion DVD. been completely recorded on the naviga- You aredriving in an areathat has not yet tions? intersec- approach as you toturn way which the system stops furnishing directions on 145 yourplanned route.

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Entertainment

Operation of the radio, CD and external audio devices, as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter. On/off and tone > > > andsettingcontrols options: shared have sources audio following The On/off andtone One drive: on your vehicle's equipment. The layout of the buttons canvary depending player CD of area in Buttons > > > The audio sources can be operated using: Controls > CD changer CD player radio Business Professional Buttons on steeringwheel, referpage to iDrive the ofthe playerin area Buttons CD buttons, buttons, refer topage Programmable memory/directselection 148 * * radio or or radio 21 11 iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Operation viaiDrive 2. 1. 5 4 3 2 1 drives:Two "Entertainment". button. Move the controller backwards to open This opens the start menu. the Press Drive for navigation DVDs Drive for audio CDs > > > > on/off,volume output sound Entertainment Eject Eject CD Dchanger. CD track CD and Select player for station. radio Change Turn: adjust volume. played. is CD track most recently selectedradio station or When the system is switched on, the on/off. switch Press: Station scan/track search scan/track Station inciple refer topage 16 . in use. source is stored for the remote control currently From radio readiness, the selected audio page ofmenu opening items, to Comfort refer > > > > > > > You have the following choices: Turn knob Adjusting volume Press knob off: and outputon sound To switch Entertainment the Switching on/off the remote control currently in use. in currently control remote the the for setting radio stored is readiness, From the steering wheel, refer to page can withYou adjustthe buttonson also volume desired volume is set. pose. soundoutput Switch onthe this for again pur- off. switched ignition the with minutes approx. 20 for available is output sound the drive, single a For off. thatsound switched outputis cates This symbol on the Control Display indi- Display Control the on symbol This ple stations. reception, storestatio strongest with station update radio: the other adjustments can be made, e.g. with "Set": depending ontheaudio source, interface USB/audio "AUX": AUX-In connection "CD": CD player or CD changer radio satellite "SAT": "WB": Weather Band station reception radio "AM": and "FM" 18 directly tothe screen last displayed, another you From menu, can change . < 1 1 next tothe player until CD the next to the CD player. CD the to next * n, control,tone sam- 11 . controller. Select"Set""Tone", thenand and press the menu: you have opened "Entertainment" in the start The tone settings canalso beselected when 4. 3. 2. 1. Changing tone settings for the remote control currently in use. From radio readiness, the settings are stored once. at sources audio all for set are settings tone The increase. and bass, or the speed-dependent volume treble e.g. can settings, tone You alter various Tone control 1. Treble andbass Select "Audio" and press the controller. selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press and press the controller. controller until "Treble / Bass" is selected Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the 149

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance On/off and tone 2. 3. 1. increase in volume. speed. You can set various stages for the with increasing volume the increases matically The speed-dependent volume control auto- Speed-dependent volume control > > same manner as "Treble / Bass". canadjustthe distributionYou volume in the Balance and fader select "Treble"or "Bass". controller the Move tothe left rightor to is selected. Turn the controller until the desired setting troller. Select "Speed volume" and press the con- "Fader": front/rearvolume distribution "Balance": left/right volume distribution 150 3. 2. 1. Surround. and Stereo between choose can You high-end soundsystem*Individual ranges. frequency all in acoustics spatial the improves that effect sound aspatial select can You HiFiSystem* Professional LOGIC7 2. The spatial sound effect is activated. Press the controller. "Surround". or "Stereo" Select controller. the press and Settings" "Surround Select changed. The adjustment is applied; the field can be controller:Turn the 1. 1. You can set individual sound frequency ranges. Equalizer* 2. Harman International Group. ofthe acompany Inc., ofLexicon, marks trade LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered Select "Off" and press the controller. To cancel the spatial sound effect: 3. controller. Select "Surround Settings" the andpress Select "Equalizer" and press the controller. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater". LOGIC7spatial is sound switched on. Press the controller. With two drives: select "Yes". select two With drives: 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. settings. tothe settings all default can tone You reset settingsResetting tone 3. 2. press the controller. and selected is "Reset" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Select "Audio" and press the controller. selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open is selected. is Turn the controller until the desired setting select the desired frequency range. the Move controller left rightto the or to 151

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio Listening toradio wavebands. Your providesradio reception ofthe and AM FM Radio 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for off. knobif the soundoutput Press the is switched gest signal, refer to page refer to signal, gest received, with station to the theupdate stron- the stations displayed cannolonger be if or stations any display not does "Autostore" If sets". "Pre- e.g. criteria, selection various of basis the Stations are shown ontheControl Display on 4. controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected. fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe "Entertainment". button. Move thecontroller backwards toopen This opens the start menu. the Press Press the controller. 152 inciple refer topage 154 . 16 . > Professional radio* displayed. criterion you can have stations In addition tothe stations currently displayed, Turn the controller. Changing stations > criteria: You can choose from the following selection Business radio > > > > criteria: You can choose from the following selection page to refer stored, previously have you Stations "Presets": refer to page signal, the strongest For the with Station "Autostore": on manually frequency page displayed, refer tothose tion toSelecting To set stations that can bereceived inaddi- "Manual": page to refer stored, previously have you Stations "Presets": signals in the"AM" waveband. The stations with the strongest received "Autostore": waveband. "FM" the currentlybe received canStations that in "All stations": 154 154 . . 154 . with another selection selection another with 153 . 2. 1. > > > > criteria: from following can the You selection choose criterion displayed. you canhave stations with another selection In tothe currentlyaddition stations displayed, Changing selection criteria > the steering wheel, refer to page can You change with stations also buttonson tion. sta- displayed tothe next changes system The the buttonfor corresponding direction. the Press Buttons toCDplayer next troller. tion criterion is selected and press the con- Turn controller the until desired the selec- into Change second the thefield from top. manually. frequency Selecting to refer displayed, those to tion addi- in received be can that stations set To "Manual": page Stations youhave previously stored, refer to "Presets": waveband. "AM" the in signals The stations with the strongest received "Autostore": waveband. "FM" the Stations that can currently be received in stations": "All manually. frequency Selecting to refer displayed, those to tion addi- in received be can that stations set To "Manual": 154 . 11 . radio remains on the current station. the and stations, ofthe sampling cancels This 2. 1. To endsampling: sampled. are stations The 3. 2. 1. band. stationseach thefrom of current the on wave- The system automatically plays a brief sample Sampling stations, scan 2. 1. received in addition thoseto displayed. are that stations select can you "Manual" With manually frequency Selecting scanning,To stop press thebutton again. the hold and press stations, the sample To Buttons toCDplayer next Select "Scan" and press the controller. Press the controller. Select "Scan" and press the controller. displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. "Set"selected. is ler. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontrol- Change into Change second the thefield from top. ler. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontrol- buttonfor thecorresponding direction. 153

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio 3. 4. 3. 2. 1. reception. with best the ofstations list the canupdate you set, originally stations the of range transmission the you If and onalonger journey are leave ness: Busi- Radio and Professional on"AM" Radio Updating stations with bestreception 4. Select "Manual" and press the controller. quency. Turn controller acertain fre-the toset "Set" is selected. is "Set" Select "Autostore" and press the controller. into field Change top. second the the from ler. Select "FM"or "AM"press and thecontrol- Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. 154 4. 3. 2. 1. Via iDrive Storing stations are displayed. istion updated. frequenciesThe ofthe stations displayThe with stations best ofthe the recep- 5. Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. selected. is "Set" Select the desired frequency or station. troller. tion criterion is selected and press the con- Turn controllerthe until selec- desired the into field Change second the the from top. ler. Select "FM"or "AM"press and thecontrol- Select "Autostore" and press the controller. 7. 6. 5. 3. 2. 1. position memory a Changing to page refer buttons,also selection ble memory/direct onthe programma- astation can store also You selection buttons direct memory/ programmable With for the remote control currently in use. From radio readiness, the stations are stored time. ashort again after once displayed are criterion selection last the of stations The 2. 1. The stationis stored. Press the controller. selected. is ory position Turn controller the until desired the mem- isdisplayed. "Presets" controller. the press and "Store" Select Other menu items are displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. isselected. "Set" Select the desired station. controller. the press and "Presets" Select ton. astation. Select 21 ... Press and hold desired but- desired hold and Press ... . RDS RadioData System RDS rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 3. 2. 1. Switching RDS on/off* station names are displayed. disrupted,or time before cantake the it some weak is reception the If Display. Control the on are shown names ditions good,the are station tion via is transmitted If theRDS. reception con- informa- additional range, frequency FM In the 6. 5. 4. RDS is activated. is RDS Select "RDS" and press the controller. displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. "Set"selected. is Select "FM" and press the controller. The stationis stored. Press the controller. station. the appears beside thenameor frequency of The number of the memory position selected. is ory position Turn controller the until desired the mem- controller. the press and "Store" Select 155

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio shown shown theat beginning. 2. 1. tions aredisplayed atthe beginning. can set whether the most frequently used sta- For the "All stations" selection criterion, you stations* Automatically sorting net at www.nws.noaa.gov. Service. Details are also provided on the Inter- nearest tact the the Weather office National of con- please Radio, Weather aboutNOAA tion warning messages instead. If you have a ques- special transmits and news weather routine the interrupts Weather Service National the storm, ofa case aday. In hours 24 operate stations hours,and moreoftenwhen necessary. Most 3 are routinely updated to at intervals of 1 minutes and to 6 flashes are repeated every 4 of the US Department of Trade. Weather news Administration andAtmospheric (NOAA) anic Oce- ofthe National aservice is Radio Weather flashes* news Weather Select "Favorites" and press the controller. selected. is "Set" ler. Select "All stations" and press the control- The most frequently used stations are 156 order toreceive digital stations A digital radio network quality.with improvedsound and signals.receive You can these stations digitally Many stations transmit both analog and digital High Definition Radio* unavailable in some regions. The station for weather news flashes may be 2. 1. flashes news weather up Calling iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for reception Activating/deactivating digital radio 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Select astation. Select "WB" and press the controller. controller. until "HD radio" is selected and press the Change toupper field. theTurn controller Select "Audio" and press the controller. controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press inciple refer topage must be available in 16 . deactivate deactivate digital radio reception. ruptions. In this case it maybe advisable to reception. This can result in repetitions or inter- digital and changes betweenanalog playback digitally, received continuously not is station nals. If you are in an area in which the selected simultaneously transmitted stations digital not the some With are signals being received digitally. 6. 1. select one of these programs: To Some stations transmit several programs. Selecting programsa digitalof station* 4. 3. 2. You can store a station, refer to page Thereception of digital stations is activated. This symbol is displayed when a station is Select "Off" and press the controller. ler. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontrol- is being received digitally. digitally. received is that station a Select controller. the press and "Manual" Select the steeringwheel. ital buttonsonthe station with or the radio This symbol is displayed when a station station a when displayed is symbol This Switch to the next program of the dig-the next of the Switch program to with the analog sig- analog with the 154 . utes. receptionto min- updated. 2 iscanup take This The display of the stations offering digital 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. reception. with best the stations list the of canupdate you set, originally stations the of range transmission If you are on a longer journey and leave the reception Updating stations offering digital Select "Autostore " and press the con- the press "and troller. "Autostore Select displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. into Change second the thefield from top. ler. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontrol- 157

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio 2. 1. artist. the of the currenton is track displayed, e.g.name the the With information stations, digital additional Displaying additional information tion. a againwill following displayed interrup- brief be the information additional station is changed, If a digital station is received again when the Select "Details" and press the controller. controller. the press and astation Select The information is displayed. is information The 158 3. 2. 1. 4. The channels are displayed. choice, youmust have this package enabled. packages. receiveTo the channels of your The channels are offered to you in predefined with high sound quality. You can receive over 100 different channels radio Satellite iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage channels Enabling or disabling These channels are enabled. Select "SAT". Select "Entertainment". button. the controllerMove backwards open to the opens This start menu. the Press Press the controller. fail, causing interruptions in reception. this technologyWith new signal the may * 16 < . 3. 2. 1. Disabling 2. 1. Enabling Dial the phone number. To disable thechannels: played. The electronic serial number, is ESN, dis- controller. the press and "ESN" Select controller. Select an enabled channel and press the Dial the phone number. To enable the channels: displayed. ESN,are number, serial A telephone number and the electronic enabled and press the controller. Select achannel thathasnotyet been required for disabling. The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling. The electronic serial number is 159 < <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Satellite radio 4. 3. 2. 1. Selecting andstoring channel controller. the press and category desiredthe Select If "Categories" has beenselected: Press the controller. > > > Select amenuitem: trol Display. Channels or categories appear in the Con- Select "SAT" and press the controller. news, jazz.news, All channels, sorted bycategories, e.g. "Categories": displayed. are channels All channels": "All previously. Up totwelve channels youhavestored "Presets": 160 2 1 ofthe artist. name the current onthe track mation displayed, e.g. are infor- ofthe additional and channel name The Additional information 7. 6. 5. Track Artist Select "Play" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. bol. channelsThe ofthis category are displayed. Select a channel marked with this sym- 4. 3. 2. 1. channel Storing nel. The system changes to the next enabled chan- the buttonfor corresponding direction. the Press player CD Changingchannel with buttons to next ashort time. after selection criterion are displayed once again The channelis thelastThe channels stored. of tion and press the controller. the press and tion Turn the controller to isdisplayed. "Presets" controller. the press and "Store" Select displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. Select desired channel. select memorya loca- the signal again. available is the as assoon is again possible usually Reception interference. ofradio or sources other trees, mountains near underground garages, next totall buildings, The signal maynotbeavailable in tunnels or influence no has this. on topographical conditions. The satellite radio Display. onds, a message is displayed onthe Control signalIf no bereceived can for sec-thanmore 4 Notes reasons, e.g. environmental influences or Reception may notbe possible for certain 161 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance CD player and CD changer changer. be played bythe CDpl CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can Compressed audio files* Listening toCDs CD changer CD playerand 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for the drive: startTo playback whenthere is already a CDin Via iDrive dependingdata onthedirectory structure. the in toread minute 1 uptoapprox. cantake it files, audio compressed with CDs For on. is put if automatically starts soundout- the Playback up. TheCD is automatically pulled in. labeledside the drive with the into CD the Insert Inserting CD The upper drive is for audio CDs. drives: two With CD player: startingCD "Entertainment". button. Move thecontroller backwards toopen This opens the start menu. the Press 162 inciple refer topage ayer, the ayer, but notby CD 16 . The CDemerges slightly from the drive. buttonnext toCD player. the Press CD Eject the refer player, tostart topage CD tons but- selection memory/direct programmable You can store the function CDplayer on the buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ put is switched on. switched is put if automatically soundout- starts the Playback 4. 3. The CD player is started. ler. until "CD"selected is and press the control- field from topandturnthe controller the tothe aCD second changer, With change the controller. controller until "CD" is selected and press toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe * 21 . 4. 3. 2. 1. Via iDrive page to refer insert, and magazine CD the Fill CD changer: startingCD to page the refer changer, buttonstostart selection CD changer on the programmable memory/direct ofthe can CD You compartment a store CD selection buttons direct memory/ programmable With Display. Control the on is status indicated load CD magazine's The 1. track back begins with the lowest CD, e.g. CD1, If the CDmagazine has been newly filled, play- selected. endAt the last ofthe track, next the CD bewill the controller. desired is -6, CD, selected CD1 press and necessary. theTurn controller until the totheChange second field from topifthe the controller. controller until "CD" is selected and press Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the "Entertainment". button. the controllerMove backwards open to the opens This start menu. the Press 166 21 . . Select a track Select atrack turning theby controller. Via iDrive the steering wheel, refer to page can You changealso track the with buttons on The track is displayed on the Control Display. track. play atthe start of the start CD will The the buttonfor corresponding track. direction repeatedly until you reach the desired the Press Buttons toCDplayer next Selecting atrack 2. 1. Compressed audio files* Select the andpress track the controller. the controller. Select the directory if necessary and press 163 11 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance CD player and CD changer page selection mable buttons, refermemory/direct to onthe acertain program- track store can You To exit fromthe menu: Select the directory and press the controller. the directory: change To 2. 1. ofthe artist. name the informationany storedthe on current track, e.g. compressedWith audio files, youcan display Displayinginformation track* on the remote controlthe currently in use. From radio readiness, the setting is stored for played. The information for the current track are dis- Select the arrow and press the controller. Select "Details" and press the controller. Press the controller. 21 . 164 player remains on current remains player the on track. This cancels ofthe sampling and the tracks, 2. 1. sampling: end To 2. 1. ofthe each onthe from tracks CD. current sample abrief plays automatically system The scan tracks, Sampling 2. 1. Compressed audio files* Select "Scan" and press the controller. Press the controller. Select "Scan" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed. Select "Set" and press the controller. > > Select the desired menuitem: troller. Select the con- the track current press and "Scan all" and press the controller. To sample all tracks ofthe select CD, the controller. tory, select "Scan directory" and press To sampleall tracks the of currentdirec- on the currenton the track. This cancels sampling, andthe player remains 2. 1. To endsampling: 1. atrack Repeating 2. 2. 1. repeating:To stop The current track on the CDis repeated. press the controller. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed. are items menu Other Select "Set" and press the controller. Select "Repeat" and press the controller. Select "Repeat" and press the controller. Pressthe controller again. 2. 1. repeating:To stop 2. 1. Compressed audio files* 2. 1. Compressed audio files* 2. 1. random To stop function: 2. 1. sequence. in arandom once played In the currentthis mode, onthe aretracks CD Random play sequence and press the controller. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" Press the controller. > > Select the desired menu item: troller. Select the current track the andpress con- > Select the desired menu item: troller. Select the current track the andpress con- controller. press the "Random" and Select Press the controller. controller. press the "Random" and Select displayed. are items menu Other Select "Set" and press the controller. the controller. tory, select "Repeat directory" and press repeat ofthe all tracks direc-current To the andpress track" controller. "Repeat repeat the select track, selected To tory" and press the controller. in random order, select "Random direc- directory current ofthe play all tracks To 165

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance CD player and CD changer 2. 1. function: random To stop Fast forward/reverse To insert CDs into the CD magazine into CD the magazine To insert CDs magazine CD Removing glovethe compartment. in installed is CDs six for changer CD BMW The CD magazine button corre- the for sponding direction. the and hold Press player:CD nextto Buttons read in again. read magazine thattheinserted again so CDs canbe before seconds pushing in the Wait atleast 2 Press button Press magazine from the CDchanger: the remove it,first you from must them remove and press the controller. Select directory" "Random all" or "Random Press the controller. > controller. the press all" and "Random select order, To play all tracks oftheCD in random 166 2 , magazine CD the 1 is ejected. is 1 or or Pull outthe the tray desired CD. and remove Removing CDs: with themagazine labeled side up. ofthe into Insert CD compartment each one CDs: Inserting memory surface. its dataside touching CD the with reflective them their care by hold taking toavoid edges, When inserting or removing CDs, remember to magazine CD Inserting/removing CDs into/from loaded CDs and is then ready for operation. reads automatically in changer CD the The directionthe ofthe arrow. Push in the CDmagazine as far as possible in Inserting CD magazine longer eject. otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDDo not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. may nolonger eject properly. other- as singles, or adapter and the can jam wise CD/DVD the CD e.g. adapter, an with DVDs cmand donotplay CDs/ in/12 diameter of 4.7 Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard irreparable damagetothe device. playback due toheat applied as these can become detached during Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels otherwise severe eye candamage result. notoperate theucts. Do if cover is damaged, Notes pen intended for this purpose. Only label CDs/DVDs onthe upper side with a blank. CD/DVD the of qualityor highage data-creation or recording processes, or poor recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- Self-recorded CDs/DVDs causes. this canbe DVDs, ofthe toone following due If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs temporarily prevent playback. and scan lens laser's the or CD/DVD the on tion High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- Humidity whether it has been inserted correctly. If aCD/DVD cannotbeplayed, first check CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be. more they sensitive be may to instances faulty optimized for performance in vehicles. In some BMW CD/DVD changers andplayers havebeen malfunctions General officially designated Class 1 laser prod- 1laser Class designated officially changers are and players CD/DVD BMW < buildup andcancause Plus , the center outward. cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available If necessary, clean thereflective scanning side Care or played be cannot can only toalimited played be extent. CDs/DVDs some that mean tection feature by the manufacturer. This can CDs/DVDs are oftenprovided with acopy pro- CDs/DVDs with copy protection sunlight. 122 over to temperatures not CDs/DVDs Do subject Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. ture. mois- and scratches dust, fingerprints, Avoid Damaged CDs/DVDs 7 /50 6 , high levels of humidity or direct 167

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance AUX-In connection Connecting via iDrive. cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted the vehi- via the sound play player, and MP3 an You can connect an external audio device, e.g. AUX-In connection out port of the device ofthe port out external toconnection speaker system, connect the headset orline- playthroughTo tracks audio thevehicle's loud- 1 / n35mmjack plug in/3,5 1/8 playback: audio Connection for 168 1 . iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Via iDrive The audio device must be switched on. Starting audio playback 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. tons to start audio playback, refer audio refer tostart to playback, page tons but- selection memory/direct programmable the cansave audio ontheYou function AUX buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ Adjust volume and sound ifnecessary. sound and volume Adjust controller. the press and IN" "AUX Select the controller. press and selected is "AUX" until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe "Entertainment". Move the controller backwards button. to open This opens the start menu. the Press inciple refer topage 21 16 . . the USB/audiothe interface. The menustructure of the iPod is supported by suitable. yourAsk BMWcenter which audio devices are cannot beensured for every audio device. market, theable operationvehicle on via the Due to the large number of audio devices avail- format. in the lists M3U playback as (PCM)e.g. MP3, WAV and WMA, well ACC, as audio files,common play backThe system can operate these via iDrive. then You can stick). memory USB player, (MP3 device aUSB aniPod or interface, e.g. audio can You audio connect tothedevices USB/ USB/audio interface ers, connect the iPod tothe connections For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- website: www.bmw.com centerplease contact aBMW consultor our adapter for Apple iPods. For more information, To connect the iPod, use the BMWcable iPod 2 1 Connecting and 1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug jack mm in/3,5 1/8 Connection foraudio playback: interface USB 2 . 1

* played. in the vehicle is deleted. stored device USB first of the tracks the of tion informa- is the device If afifthconnected, USB tracks. 20,000 the stored in vehicle,be ofapprox. atotal for can devices ofup USB to information four The lists. playback and the information via transfer the Following cancall you tracks upthe the directories and file names. via tracks the can select you transfer the During device USB the number oftracks. onthe and some time. The time required is dependent on totheferred vehicle. cantake This process are playback ofthe device the trans- lists USB and genre) (e.g. music ofall tracks tion artist, connecting first informa- the After time, the for tion ers, connect device the USB connec- to the For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- damage. mechanical against device USB USB storage medium 1 . Rights Management (DRM) cannot be cannot (DRM) Management Rights Music tracks with integrated Digital tion interfaceto USB protect the andyour Use a flexible adapter cable for connec- < 169 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance USB/audio interface 3. 2. 1. possible. if displayed be If the audio device has a device name, this will Via iDrive Starting audio playback start start playback, audio refer topage grammable memory/direct selection buttons to onthe pro- function the "USB" cansave You buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ 4. 5. the controller. press and selected is "AUX" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe "Entertainment". button. Move thecontroller backwards toopen This opens the start menu. the Press device and press the controller. ofthe the or name audio "USB" Select The playback starts with playback the starts The first track. 170 21 . played. The information for the current track are dis- 2. 1. track, artist.current the ofthe e.g. name You can display any information stored on the Displaying information track on 2. 1. call upthe the via tracks file directory. and information. USBWith devices you can also can You call upthe via tracks the lists playback Selecting a track Select "Details" and press the controller. Press the controller during playback. Select the track and press the controller. the andpress "Artists", controller. or "Playlists" e.g. selection, your Make 2. 1. atrack Repeating rs n odte thebutton for corre- sponding direction. andholdPress the nextplayer: toCD Buttons forward/reverse Fast 2. 1. End randomplayback: 2. 1. all ofanartist. order, e.g. in tracks random You can play theback tracks of the selected list Random play sequence 2. 1. repeating:To stop troller. con- the press and track" "Repeat Select troller. Select the current track the andpress con- Select "Random" and press the controller. press the "Random" and Select Press the controller. controller. press the "Random" and Select troller. Select the current track the andpress con- troller. con- the press and track" "Repeat Select Press the controller. proper playback cannot always be ensured. be always playback cannot proper Kbit/s, than256 greater bit e.g. files, rates Depending on the configuration of the audio driving. while resulting distraction can reduce road safety wise, theaudio devicebe damaged the can and Other- device. audio the of instructions ating extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper- > > > > > instructions Connecting Notes external devices. the interface notuse audio Do torecharge Do notconnect harddisks. USB interface. tothe lamps, USB/audio Do notconnect anydevices, e.g.fans or not Do force plugthe into the interface. USB operation. device toa socket in the vehicle during therefore unnecessary to connect the audio function.this Itis device audio supports the nected audio device with power, provided The USB/audio interface supplies the con- extreme environmental conditions, e.g. the device audio notsubject Do to < 171

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Communications

This chapter summarizes how to operate your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and how to use BMW Assist or TeleService. Telephoning phone paired can be operated via the vehicle. simultaneously,respective the last mobile neously. If several mobile phones are detected to mobilefour phones canbe stored simulta- is in the vehicle interior. Thelogon data of up it soon as ignition as switchedor the running on automatically detected with again the engine A mobile phone thathas been paired once is on the steering wheel and byvoice. ate the mobile via phone iDrive, with the buttons mobile phonein the vehicle once, youcan oper- preparation package. After pairing a suitable iswith full equippedYour BMW a mobilephone The concept Telephoning users. can endanger vehicle occupants and other road observe this precaution, your being distracted the hands-free system instead. If you do not phone in your hand while you are driving; use attention tothe particular following: information, we request that you direct your and precautions safety description of detailed a operating instructions for separate phone's gency. While you should consult your mobile ways,many can andevensave lives inan emer- in convenient more life makes phone car A safety For your for. offered are which adapters snap-in phones mobile ter voice reproduction quality. Askyour cen- BMW recept network improved nal antennaofyour vehicle. This ensures mobile the to phone connectedbe to exter-the and the charged tobe battery enables cradle, phone amobile adapter, snap-in so-called The Using snap-inadapter* inyour vehicle phone Using a allow you to do so. Do not hold the mobile the not hold Do so. todo you allow Only make entries when traffic conditions < 174 ion and a consistent ion aconsistent and * phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur. vehiclethe with the mobile ofthe keypad Avoid operating a mobile phonedetected by > > > > phone operating instructions.phone for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile ing foryourmobileCaring phoneintheseparate You canfind whatyou need toknow aboutcar- Care instructions other mobile phones. software version. Malfunctions can occur with described in this Owner's Manual with a certain for. These mobile phones support the functions available are adapters snap-in phones mobile mobile phonepreparation packageor which with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the yourAsk BMWcenter which mobile phones Suitable mobile phones progress. Ifthis happens, youmust logoffthe in already is Assist BMW to call a while Assist or establishedbeing BMW nection is to connection usingmobilethe phonewhile acon- notbeIt may toestablish possible a telephone tion", only AssistBMW calls are possible. "BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica- When the status information "BMW Assist" or Assist calls. hands-free unit for BMW the via system Assist BMW the use can You Assist calls system*: BMW Assist callsPlacing phone withBMW You can operate the mobile phone Operating options buttons, buttons, refer topage Programmable memory/directselection Voice commands, refer topage Buttonson steering wheel, refer to page iDrive, refer topage iDrive, refer 16 21 * 185 using: 11 mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to Preparation via iDrive place a call with the mobile phone. iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16. 3. Press the button to open the start Commissioning menu. glance a At

Pairing mobile phone in vehicle The following prerequisites must be met: > Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full mobile phone prepara-

tion package. Information on this subject is Controls also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com > The mobile phone is ready to operate. 4. Press the controller to open the menu. > The Bluetooth link on the vehicle, refer to page 179, and on the mobile phone is 5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

active. Driving tips > Depending on the mobile phone, the mobile phone may need presetting: e.g. via the fol- lowing menu items: > Bluetooth activated > Connection not with confirmation

> Reconnect Navigation > Depending on the mobile phone model, the setting energy saving mode can, for exam- 6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the paired mobile phone. > For pairing, specify any desired number as

the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue- Entertainment tooth passkey is no longer required follow- ing successful pairing. > The ignition is switched on. Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi- cle stopped, otherwise the passengers and other road users can be endangered due to Communications a lack of attentiveness on the part of the driver.<

Switching on ignition 1. Insert the remote control as far as possible into the ignition lock. 2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/ Mobility Stop button without depressing the brake or clutch pedal.

175 Reference Telephoning 7. 8. 9. select "Phone" and press the controller. into field top, Change second the the from troller. "PairSelect new phone" press and the con- played. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- ler. Select "Start pairing" and press the control- 176 phone. operatingto the instructions ofyour mobile item AuthorizationorSecure connection. Refer Bluetooth link, e.g.a thepermanent via menu ignitionthe switched on. minutes with the engine running or imum of 2 a max- within detected be will it interior, vehicle The next time you use the mobile phone in the 14. 13. 12. tooth passkey you specified. mobile your iDrive or phone toenter the Blue- be requested consecutively via the display of Depending onyour mobile phone,you will first Pairing 11. 10. Preparation with mobile phone tion" menuappears. "Communica- the until seconds afew Wait controller. select "Confirm passkey" and press the into Change thirdthe thefield from top, Display. Control the on and Bluetooth passkey onthe mobile phone seconds are available for entering the 30 Depending onthe mobile phone,approx. the Bluetooth passkey. Enter the mobile phone display. vehicle ofthe Select Bluetooth the name on on themobile phone display. Bluetooth name of the vehicleis also shown nect or pair under Bluetooth device. The ofyour tions e.g. phone, mobile con- find, model, totheon the refer instruc- operating on themobile phone anddiffer depending carried out be must operations Additional be necessary to make certain settings for for certain settings to make necessary be With some mobile phone models it may < As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the To repeat pairing: vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the 1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con- SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit- troller. ted to your vehicle. This transmission is depen- dent on your mobile phone, refer to the operat- glance a At ing instructions of your mobile phone if necessary, and can take several minutes. If not all phone book entries are displayed: > Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.

> It may not be possible to display phone Controls book entries with special characters. Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec- 2. Repeat steps 9 to 14. utively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact pairing data of the mobile phone for which the BMW Customer Relations. pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will To call BMW Customer Relations: be deleted. Driving tips Select "Help" and press the controller. Check if pairing is unsuccessful > Is the mobile phone supported by the mobile phone preparation package? Infor- mation on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com. Navigation > Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on the mobile phone display and via iDrive. > Have you required longer than 30 seconds The phone number of BMW Customer Rela- to enter the Bluetooth passkey? tions and information required for pairing is > Only a limited number of devices can be shown on the display. With mobile phones Entertainment connected to the mobile phone. Delete the already paired, you can select the phone num- connection to other devices if necessary. ber of BMW Customer Relations to establish > The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the connection. the mobile phone off and then on again or disconnect the power supply. Communications Mobility

177 Reference Telephoning 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for vehicle. the via ated in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper- selected is phone mobile a as long As list. the in You canchangetheorder ofthemobile phones cle. mobile phone highest upin the list via the vehi- vehicle simultaneously,operatecan you the eral paired mobile phones are detected by the stored thepairing data can bedisplayed. If sev- The mobile phones for which the vehicle has List of paired mobile phones > With asingle drive: > > drives: two With Select the desired mobile phone. select "Phone" and press the controller. into field top, Change second the the from Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. the button toopen start Press the controller to open the menu. the Press press the controller. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller. Select the desired mobile phone and field. into bottom the controller change the tothe Move rear to 178 inciple refer topage 16 . iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for of the mobile phone. the via youvehicle, the candelete pairingdata If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 7. > > drives: two With Select the desired mobile phone. select "Phone" and press the controller. into field Change second the the from top, "Bluetooth" is selected. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. the button toopen start Press the controller to open the menu. the Press Switch offthemobile phone. upward by oneposition. The selected mobile phone is moved troller. Select "Move device up" and press the con- press the controller. Select the desired mobile phone and field. into bottom the controller change tothe the Move rear to inciple refer topage 16 . With a single drive: To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link > Select the desired mobile phone and between your vehicle and your mobile phone: press the controller. 1. Remove the mobile phone from the cradle and switch it off. At a glance a At 2. Press the button to open the start menu. 3. Press the controller to open the menu. 4. Select "Settings" and press the controller. 5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. Controls

8. Select "Delete device" and press the con- troller. Driving tips

6. Change into the second field from the top, select "Settings" and press the controller. Navigation

The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list. The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are also deleted.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Entertainment Bluetooth technology is not approved in all countries. Observe the applicable local 7. Select "Bluetooth communication active" regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue- and press the controller to activate or deac- tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile tivate the link. phone if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot

operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and Communications other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com- puter.< Mobility The Bluetooth link is activated. The Bluetooth link is deactivated.

179 Reference Telephoning Adjusting volume more than 25 minutes. call ongoinghands-free via thean forno system control from the ignition lock, you can continue remote the removing after e.g. off, switched When the ignition and radio readiness are > > > > > iDrive: You can operate the following functions via viaiDrive Operation the steering wheel, refer to page with volume canalso buttonson adjustthe You minimum volume. tained, evenifthe other audio sources are set to volumeThisfor the hands-free system is main- volume. desired the select call to during a knob the Turn rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- Ending acallEnding calls. accepted of list Dialing stored phonenumbers,e.g. fromthe book Dialing phone numbers from the phone Dialing phone numbers Accepting/refusing acall 180 11 . > > > Requirements > > that you: speech quality during a call, werecommend noises to a certain the degree. Tooptimize preparation package can compensate for these fullphone noises. mobile The loud background excessively to due be may this well, you stand If the are you person talking tocannotunder- Speech quality iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for menu. following the the via "Communication" You operate many of the functions described in Communication Opening 2. 1. cle. The mobile phone is detected by the vehi- switched on. The engine is running or the ignition is is ready to operate. stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone The logon ofthedata mobile phoneare Reduce volume of hands-free system front outlets vent opened downward control climate automatic or pointing the ofthe the reducing windows, the air volume Reduce backgroundnoises, e.g.byclosing munication". Move the controller forward to open "Com- the button toopen start menu. the Press inciple refer topage 16 . Receiving calls code, and phone number. If you have the phone number of the caller The letters correspond to the digits on the stored in the phone book and the phone num- keypad of the mobile phone. ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry To delete the last digit: At a glance a At is displayed. Move the controller toward the right to select the arrow and press the control- Accepting a call ler. Press the button on the steering wheel. 4. Select "Dial number" and press the control- Alternative: ler. "Accept" is selected. Controls Press the controller. Driving tips

Alternative: Press the button on the steering wheel. For your phone number to be displayed to the Rejecting a call person you are calling, the display of phone Select "Reject" and press the controller.

numbers must be enabled by your service pro- Navigation The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has vider. been activated. With programmable memory/ Calling direct selection buttons You can store phone numbers on and call them Dialing phone numbers up with the programmable memory/direct 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller. selection buttons, refer to page 21. Entertainment

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel. Alternative: 1. Select the phone number and press the controller. Communications

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller. 3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing

the individual digits and pressing the con- Mobility troller. Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area

181 Reference Telephoning 2. > > > > > available: lists are Five list and establish the connection. the from subscriber desired the select can You played instead of the phone number. entry the ofthe phone the name is dis- book, vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the the entriesand the of phone are book stored in Phone numbershave called, you incoming calls listaa phone numberor storedinbook Dialing a phone number from phone Press the controller. selected: is call" "End sent. telephone number of the caller to have been accepted calls are stored. This requires the The phone numbers of the last eight "Received calls" to have been sent. requires the telephone number of the caller which were not accepted are stored. This phonetheof last numbersThe eight calls calls" "Missed is atthe dialed number list. topofthe dialed are automatically stored. The last The last eight phone numbers you have "Redial" list. 8 Top the in stored cally -Z" are the automati- book"A from phone The eight numbers called most frequently "Top 8" number, are sorted alphabetically. phone and the name of consisting book, The entries of the mobile-phone phone "A - Z" 182 4. 3. 2. 1. phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension: You can change a phone number stored in the number. the home, name is shown once for eachphone officemobile phone and under one name, e.g. If different phone numbers are stored in the 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Control Display. entries. Thephone entriesbook appear on the The list "A - Z" is available for your phone book book Dialing a phone number from phone Select digits" "Add and press thecontroller. troller. Select the desired entry and press the con- controller. press- Z"and the Select"A Select"Phone" presscontroller. and the The system dials the number. Select "Call" and press the controller. troller. Select the desired entry and press the con- press the controller. and entry desired the of letter first the select theTo limit of number entries, displayed controller. press- Z"and the Select"A Select"Phone" presscontroller. and the 5. Change the phone number. Deleting individual entries 6. Select "Dial number" and press the control- 1. Select the desired entry from the list and ler. press the controller.

2. Select "Delete" and press the controller. glance a At Dialing a phone number stored in a list To select an entry and establish a connection: 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller. 2. Select list and press the controller: > "Top 8"

> "Redial" Controls > "Missed calls" > "Received calls" The entry is deleted.

Deleting entire list Driving tips 1. Select an entry from the list and press the controller. 2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- Navigation troller. Entertainment

3. Select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.

BMW Contact* 4. Select "Call" and press the controller. If you are not enabled for BMW Assist, you can The system dials the number.

have several service phone numbers displayed: Communications > BMW Roadside Assistance* when you require breakdown assistance > BMW center, e.g. when you want to make an appointment for service > BMW Customer Relations* for information

on all aspects of your vehicle Mobility If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 189.

183 Reference Telephoning Contact is established. is Contact 6. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for cle: bers if your mobile phone is paired in the vehi- You can dial the displayed service phone num- 4. 5. Select "Call" and press the controller. troller. the con- press and Contact" "BMW Select "Communication". button. Move the controller forward to select This opens the start menu. the Press the controller. press and Numbers" Contact "BMW Select > > > press the controller: Select one of the following menu items and "Service Request" Relations" "Customer "Roadside Assistance" 184 inciple refer topage 16 . 3. 2. 1. has been established. functionThis is available when aconnection e.g. remote checking of an answering machine. or services controllingfor devices, to network access for required is method dialing tone The dialing method tone via number phone Transmitting mobile phonemodel. confirmed by a tone depending onthe and immediately sent is character Each controller. Select the desired character bottom field is selected. controller the Move until backwards the drives: two With Select "Keypad" and press the controller. Press the controller. With asingle drive: Establish connection.

and press the Changing between mobile Operation by voice* phone and hands-free system The concept

From mobile phone to hands-free You can operate your mobile phone without glance a At system* having to remove your hands from the steering You can continue calls begun outside the Blue- wheel. When making your entries, you will be tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free supported by announcements or questions in system when the motor is running or the igni- many cases. tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile The same prerequisites as for operation via phone, the system automatically changes over iDrive apply, refer to page 180. to the hands-free mode. Controls For mobile phones that do not automatically Voice commands change over to the hands-free mode: Activating system > Depending on the mobile phone model used, the conversation can be continued via 1. Briefly press the button on the steering the hands-free system if necessary. Act wheel.

according to what is shown on the mobile An acoustic signal indicates that you can Driving tips phone display, refer to the operating say commands. instructions of your mobile phone. 2. Say the command. > Press the button above the storage compartment. Changing over may take sev- Ending/canceling operation by voice eral seconds. Press the button on the steering wheel or Navigation From hands-free system to mobile {Cancel}. phone In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command, When you telephone via the hands-free system, e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the you can also continue the call via the mobile button on the steering wheel. phone if necessary, depending on the mobile phone model. Act according to what is shown Having possible commands read aloud on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper- Entertainment ating instructions of your mobile phone. The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word. As an alternative, you can deactivate the Blue- You can have the possible commands spoken tooth link. by the system at any point: Depending on your mobile phone model, poor {Help}. reception of the wireless communications net- work can result in the system changing from the Communications hands-free system to the mobile phone. Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.: {Dial name} or {Name}. The system recognizes digits from zero to nine. You can say each digit individually or group Mobility them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

185 Reference Telephoning { button on the steering wheel. Press the dialog: the start To Example: dialing phone numbers established. The connection to the desired subscriber is Dialing phone numbers Calling use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- mum volume. even if the other audio sources are set to mini- volumethe forinstructionsThis maintained, is instructions. during knob the Turn system: the from for canadjustthe instructionsYou the volume Settingvolume ofinstructions { e.g. You say Dial number Dial Dial { 3. 2. 1. }{{ 2 5 7890 456 123 { theand then country code. For telephone calls abroad, say Say the phone number. { Dial Dial number 186 } }{{ . } } . {{ {{ Dependingequipment: on The voice control answers control voice The Dialing number 2 5 7890. And next? 456 123 Please say the number 2 5 7890. Continue? 456 123 { Plus } }} repeated as often as you like. asyou often as repeated The command this sequence ofdigits. been repeated by the system, you can delete ofdigits sequence has the After last spoken Correcting phone number > > sonal phonevoice book. Operating by voice command requires aper- book Voice phone All entered digits up to this point are deleted. phonenumber Deleting consists ofanameandphone number. can entries input.be always entry An 50 Upto numbers. or phone new to store to call phone numbers stored in the mobile not possible to use voice command either mobile phone's memory. In this case, it is input byvoice and are independent of your asingle drive, With be must entries the adopted from your mobile phone'smemory. are automatically the entries DVDs, igation With separate drives for audio CDs and nav- { The digits are deleted. { Delete Correct number }} }} }} or } { Correct number } . } can be Creating and editing voice phone Selecting an entry book* The connection to the phone number of the Store entry: selected entry is established. { } An entry always consists of a name and phone 1. Dial name . glance a At number. The dialog for selecting an entry is 1. {Save name}. opened. 2. Speak the name. 2. Say the name when prompted. The spoken length of the names in the 3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}. phone book must not exceed approx. 2seconds. Redialing Controls 3. Speak the phone number after being The {Redial} command calls "Redial". requested to do so by the system. 4. To store the phone number: {Save}. Notes Delete entry: Important for voice commands

You can delete any entry from the voice phone Driving tips For voice commands, keep the following in book. mind: 1. {Delete name}. > Issue the commands smoothly and at nor- The dialog for deleting an entry is mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis opened. and pauses. 2. Say the name when prompted. > Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof

{ } Navigation 3. Confirm the prompt with Yes . closed to prevent interference from ambi- Delete all entries: ent noise. {Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the > Avoid making other noise in the vehicle phone book. while speaking. 1. {Delete phone book}. The dialog for deleting phone book is

opened. Entertainment 2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}. 3. Confirm the repeated prompt with {Yes}. Have entries read aloud and select: You can have all the entries of your voice phone book read aloud in the order of input and select Communications a certain entry to establish a connection: 1. {Read phone book}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened. 2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is

read aloud. Mobility

187 Reference Telephoning 1. adapter Mounting/removing snap-in 2. Press the area area the Press adapter: snap-in the remove To Press the area remove the cover. press downuntil it engages. front and at the adapter snap-in the Insert 188 1 around around button. the 1 around buttonand the switched off. switched unlocked. steering the with or readiness radio The mobile phone's battery is charged from 2. 1. phone mobile Inserting Press button. Press Removing mobilephone tions andpress downuntil it engages. facing upwardtoward the electricalconnec- mobile Push the withphone buttons the adapter. snap-in that themobile phone canengagein the phone's antennaconnector if necessary, so protective the capfrom Remove the mobile using the when ignition phone the is theTo vehicle'sprotect batteries, avoid < BMW Assist*

BMW Assist provides you with various services. Offered services glance a At For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist The following services are available via Response Center if an emergency request* has BMW Assist: been initiated. > Emergency request, refer to page 223: Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi- When you press the SOS button, a connec- vidually agreed contract. tion is established to the BMW Assist

Response Center. The BMW Assist Controls After your contract has expired, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW further steps to help you. Assist Response Center without you having to > visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist sys- Automatic collision notification: tem has been deactivated, no BMW Assist ser- Under certain conditions, a connection is vice will be available. The BMW Assist system established to the BMW Assist Response Center immediately after a serious acci-

can be reactivated by a BMW center after sign- Driving tips ing a new contract. dent. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Requirements > Enhanced roadside assistance: You can call Roadside Assistance* of the You can use BMW Assist when the following BMW Group should you require help in the requirements are met: event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehi- Navigation > The installed BMW Assist system is logged cle data and position data are transmitted on to a mobile phone network. This network during this time. must be capable of transmitting the ser- > BMW Customer Relations: vices. For information related to your vehicle, call > To transmit position data, the vehicle must BMW Customer Relations. be able to determine the current position. > TeleService: Entertainment > In order to activate and update BMW Assist, The data on the service status of your vehi- a GPS signal must be available. cle or on required inspections are transmit- > You have subscribed to BMW Assist with ted to your BMW center either automati- your BMW center or with the BMW Assist cally prior to the due date or when you Response Center. Activation must be com- request a BMW service appointment. pleted. > Remote door unlock:

> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 194. Inform the BMW Assist Response Center, Communications e.g. if your remote control is not available and you want to have the vehicle unlocked. > Stolen vehicle recovery: After your vehicle has been reported to the police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can locate its position. To do this, Mobility the vehicle electronics must be ready for operation.

189 Reference BMW Assist cierge service via the Internet. con- Assist BMW tothe access have also You Assist Response Center, see below. BMW button tocontactthe SOS the Press mobile phonewith you. Response Center, e.g. if youdo nothave your Assist BMW the via ofcalls number limited weather. With Critical Calling, you can make a the planning,and trafficconditions, route on vices, e.g. the concierge service or information In addition, you can beprovided with other ser- 1. button. SOS the via Center Response Assist the BMW contact can You Center BMW AssistResponse Contacting Using services > > > vices: The following characteristics apply to the ser- Characteristics of theoffered services 2. lamps may differ somewhat. arrangement of the switches and indicator Depending onthe vehicle's equipment, the Briefly press protective cover toopen. CBS Condition Based Service data. vehiclethe data,your position the current or be example, can, for datatransmitted The possible todoboth. In countries, it country. and the some is depending equipment onthe transmitted, contact is Voice orestablished data are The offered services are country-specific. rs h utnfra es seconds. button the 2 atleast for Press 190 iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Roadside assistance 4. 3. 2. 1. tacted. con- is Center Response Assist BMW The rent vehicle position is displayed. If the location determined, can be the cur- the controller. press and Assistance" "Roadside Select and press the controller. selected is Assist" "BMW until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe "Communication". Move the controller forward to select button. This opens the start menu. the Press inciple refer topage 16 . 5. Select "Start service" and press the con- 6. Select "Auto Request" and press the con- troller. troller. The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you to the Roadside Assistance of the At a glance a At BMW Group.

TeleService

Automatic service notification* The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto- Controls matically prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW center was notified. Manual service notification 1. Press the button. You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's This opens the start menu. service status to your BMW center when you wish to arrange a service appointment. 2. Press the controller to open the menu. 1. Press the button. 3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- Driving tips This opens the start menu. ler. 2. Move the controller forward to select "Communication". 3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller. Navigation

4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler. Entertainment 5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller. 4. Select "Service Request". Communications Mobility 5. Press the controller. 6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

191 Reference BMW Assist appointment for service. for appointment center contact will upan toset you Your BMW transmitted. for are datarelevant service The 3. 2. 1. you can contact BMWCustomer Relations. vehicle, your of aspects all on information For Contacting BMW Customer Relations 4. tions by the BMW Assist Response Center. Response Assist the by BMW tions Customer Rela- willYou be connected to BMW 6. 5. and press the controller. selected is Assist" "BMW until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe "Communication". button. Move the controller forward to select This opens the start menu. the Press Select "Customer Relations". "Customer Select troller. Select"Start service" presscon- and the Press the controller. 192 you with a BMW Assist concierge. Assist aBMW with you connect will Center Response Assist BMW The 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Calling up information Center. Response Assist BMW the by rately The concierge service must beenabled sepa- cierge service. con- Assist BMW the through directly booked can transmitted. hotels Many addresses be hotels and have their phone numbers and mation on current events, filling stations or Assist, you can, for example, obtain infor- BMW When you call the concierge service of Concierge service* troller. Select "Start Service" andpress the con- ler. Select"Concierge" presscontrol- and the and press the controller. selected is Assist" "BMW until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe "Communication". button. Move the controller forward to select This opens the start menu. the Press Displaying transmitted data 3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is Select the received message if necessary and selected and press the controller. press the controller. At a glance a At Controls

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller. Dialing a phone number or transferring an address for destination guidance 1. Select "Options" and press the controller. Driving tips

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Navigation controller until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller. 2. Select a menu item: The currently available BMW Assist ser- > With "Call" you can establish a telephone vices are displayed. connection. A prerequisite for this is that 6. Select "Options" and press the controller. your Bluetooth mobile phone has been

paired with the vehicle. Entertainment > Press "Select as destination" to transfer the address to the navigation system for desti- nation guidance.

Updating BMW Assist Communications

Displaying and updating services 7. Select "Update services" and press the You will be notified of any changes in the ser- controller. vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case you should update the service functions. 1. Press the button. This opens the start menu. Mobility 2. Press the controller to open the menu.

193 Reference BMW Assist again. on tolog necessary if Assist BMW Reactivate does not affect the contractual agreements. This below. see Assist, BMW reactivate and 4. 3. 2. 1. deactivated. is Assist BMW If you theblock services, connectionthe to Blocking services* 6. 5. ing an emergencyrequesting an dur- vehicle will position rent transmitted notbe AssistThe useofis BMW blocked, the cur- and 7. tings" is selected and press the controller. the press and selected is tings" Turn the controllerService until"BMW set- controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until "Settings" is menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press Select "Options" and press the controller. controller. the press and selected controller until "Enabled services" is fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe controller. Select "Terminate services" and press the 194 * . Tocancel blocking 3. 2. 1. Activating > > Requirements vices. be touse ser- activated the must Assist BMW Assist Activating BMW selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. Press the controller to open the button. This opens the start menu. the Press activationthe process. during on switched readiness radio Leave you have an unobstructed view to the sky. when isposition. best current Reception vehicle its thesure candetermine that Make 4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- Displaying vehicle data tings" is selected and press the controller. When BMW Assist is activated, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of

your vehicle may be displayed. glance a At 1. Open the start menu. 2. Press the controller to open the menu. 3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. Controls

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller. Driving tips

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller. Navigation 6. Select "Enable services" and press the con- troller. BMW Assist is enabled and the data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Entertainment controller until "Profile" is selected and press the controller. Communications

Activation takes a few minutes. The status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues to run in the background. Mobility

195 Reference

Mobility

This section helps you maintain your mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance and roadside assistance. Refueling dent. anexplosion cause afireand leaky or in anacci- tainers in the vehicle. These could become fuel transport con- reserve Never regulations. displayed.is message a and tank Refueling 3. 2. 1. can unlock the fuel filler door manually. you occur, should malfunction electrical an If Manual release door. filler fuel To open and close: press the rear edge of the Fuel filler door Pull the knobwith panel. side the off take and panel Open the snap fasteners of the right side cover located beneath it. the and mat floor the raise bay, cargo In the < applicable precautionary measures and and measures precautionary applicable handlingWhen fuel, always observe all otherwise no fuel can befilled into the before engine refueling, off Switch the 198 the gas pumpsymbol. < off firstoff the time. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks > > nozzle during refueling, otherwise this leads to filler the raising Avoid pipe. filler the into pletely When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- to the fuel filler door. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached or property damage. Otherwise, there is a danger personalof injury Observe the following when refueling following when the Observe seal and fuel vapors fuel vapors and escape. can seal aclick. hear capandturn the Fit clockwise it until you clearly Closing fillerFuel cap can occur. ensured damage and km, otherwise engine functions are not 50 liters. gal/15 US approx.4 capacity of reserve liters, including the gal/70 US 18.5 Approx. Fuel tankcapacity recovery system. a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor premature pumpshutoff precautions posted atthe filling station. safety the follow fuels, handling When cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly notcrush Do tothe bandattached the miles/ cruising range falls below 30 as as possibleRefuel soon once your < < < missing. tem will result. tem damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys- permanent Otherwise Fuel. Flex or ethanol, i.e. notuseDo E85, fuel thatconsists of85 verter will result. Fuel specifications A message may also result in unscheduled maintenance. unscheduled in result also may recommendations these with comply to Failure Gasoline. Detergent is that TopTier as as gasoline such advertised recognizedby switchingto a high-quality brand you are using, we recommend that you respond which could you be suspect related tothe fuel Should you encounter drivability problems high altitude. and temperature ambient ashigh such tions especially under certain environmental condi- defects in materials orworkmanship. applicablethe with warranties respect to equivalent amountofco-solvent, will notvoid methanol plus an MTBEor3% that is, 15% weight, by oxygen 2.8% to up with oxygenates ethanol or other ing up toand including 10% in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain- sale for offered gasolines among etc., additives, in volatility,quality: ferences fuel composition, Field experience has indicated significant dif- Use high-qualitybrands can result.age The minimum approved fuel grade is AKI 91. maximum fuelperformance.and economy Always use this premium grade fuel to obtain SuperPremium Gasoline/AKI 93 fuel Required permanent damage to the catalytic con- catalytic the to damage permanent otherwise gasoline, leaded use not Do drivability, stalling problems and starting ofThe use poor-quality fuelsresult may in minimum quality, otherwise engine dam- Do not use gasoline below the specified * is displayed if the cap is loose or < < % <

199

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Wheels and tires refer topage page vehicle. toa can tire flat lead todrive on a Attempts braking response. and handling vehicle's your impair seriously will tire i.e. flat, Aflat tire. adepressurized, with not drive result from incorrect tireinflation pressures. Do or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can starting long trips. Otherwise driving instability fort and most importantly, driving driving most safety. importantly, and fort com- driving to life,but also service tire's the to theof specified tire pressure are crucial not only maintenance andthe tires ofthe condition The Information for your safety Tire inflation pressure Wheels and tires these is available from your center. BMW approved and recommended by BMW; a list of temperature. pressuresthe for specifiedtire sizes at ambient The tables below provide all the correct inflation specificationsPressure spare wheel warm, the tire inflation pressure increases. hours. When tires are been parked for at least 2 km driving or when the vehicle has miles/2 1.25 are cold. This means after a maximum of Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires pressure Checking 83 reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to correctingpressure, tire inflation After the sizes and tire brands respectively brands tire and respectively sizes The inflation pressures apply to the tire the on including necessary, if correct and Check the tireinflation pressure regularly < , or the, or Tire Pressure Monitor, reset * 200 : at least twice a month and before before and amonth twice : atleast 85 . < loss of control over the the over control of loss < occur. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could the relevant table onthe following pages. km/hfrom mph/160 for speeds exceeding 100 pressures tire adjust necessary, if and, observe, the door post when you open the driver's door. These pressure specifications can befound on km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort. 160 mph/ column Traveling speeds 100 uptomax. pressures listed onthe following pages in the inflation tire respective tothe pressures adjust km/h, mph/160 100 up to normal driving For km/h mph/160 to100 up Tire inflation pressures for speeds age and accidents may result. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam- bv 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 above 100 Tire inflation pressures for speeds > > > ing: tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow- identification correct For rightof tire the infla- Maximum allowable driving speed conditionsLoad Tire sizes ofyour vehicle xeso 0 p/6 km/h, please mph/160 of100 excess In order to drive at maximum speeds in nlto rsue s10mh10km/h. mph/160 inflation pressures is 100 The permissible top speed forthese tire < < 8/5Z 9-3/5 620-46/320 - - 36/250 41/280 - - 36/250 36/250 - - 46/320 36/250 41/280 38/260 35/240 38/260 More details onthe permissible load and weights can be foundonpage 35/240 19 ZR 285/35 19 ZR 255/40 M+S XL V 100 18 R 245/45 ambient temperature = Cold psi/kilopascal with cold tires. tableindicated the are in in specifications pressure All Tire size occur. limits, otherwise violations of the law could speed maximum local and all national Observe Z =overZ 150 mph/240 km/h km/h mph/300 =up 186 to Y km/h mph/270 W = up to 167 km/h mph/240 V = up to 150 km/h mph/210 to131 =up H km/h mph/190 to118 =up T km/h mph/160 100 to up Q= Speed letter (in ZR tires before the R) Speed codeletter (not in ZR tires) Carrying capacity ID-code Rim diameter in inches radial – construction Belted ratio in Aspect Nominal width in mm e.g. Tire size tires. the toidentify easier andchoose it rightmakes Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire Tire identificationmarks Ξ 4/5R 245/45 ZR 285/35 18 19 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Traveling speeds Traveling 0 V 100 up to max. of up tomax. Pressure specifications in psi/kPa Tire Identification Number Temperature A AA Traction 200 wear Tread maximum section width. For example: and tire shoulder sidewallon the tread between Quality grades canbefound where applicable Uniform Tire Quality Grading wheel. spare for 10 years. This also concerns thetire ofthe yearsmost, at even if some tireslast may after 6 all tires you replace that recommends BMW tire was manufactured in week of2007. 33 thatthe indicates 3307 ... tirethe coding: DOT manufacturing The date isof tires contained in Tire age Tire age Tire size and tire design make tire for Manufacturer code e.g. DOT code: ofTransportation. U.S.Department the Tires with codesDOT meet theguidelines of including those exceeding 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Traveling speeds DOT xxxx xxx 3307 232 . 201

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Wheels and tires teristics. tics and climate. characteris- in road differences and practices service habits, driving in variations to due norm ever, and may depart significantly from the actualupon the conditions of their how- use, 100. The relative performance of tires depends graded tire a as course government the on well 150 would wear one and one-half (1 ernment testcourse. For example,tirea graded under controlled conditions on a specified gov- on ofthe tested rate when wear tire the based rating acomparative grade is tread wear The Tread wear thesegrades.to Temperature A BC C AAAB Traction Tread wear DOT QualityGrades a a level ofperformance which all passenger car sudden tire failure. Thegrade Ccorresponds to tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to tire ofthe material to degenerate andreduce Sustained high temperature can cause the on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. heat when tested under controlled conditions its ability and ofheat todissipate generation tire's resistance C,representing the and tothe The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Temperature nering, hydroplaning, or tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cor- traction poor performance. have C may marked tire A concrete. and asphalt of surfaces test government specified on conditions trolled on wet pavement, as measured under con- These grades represent the tire's ability to stop AA, A, B, and C. are from highest traction grades, The to lowest, Traction Federal Safety Requirements in addition in addition Requirements Safety Federal to conform must tires car passenger All based on based straight-ahead braking traction this tire is to assigned grade traction The < 202 < peak traction charac- peak γ ) timesas Indicates specially reinforced tires. XL mer tires. These have better winter properties than sum- tires. all-season and Winter M+S safety, new tires should installed. be should tires new safety, suitable for winter conditions. Forthe sake of mm,they becomeperceptibly less in/4 of 0.16 When winter tires wear down past a tread depth surface. are road present the on water of amounts only small evenhydroplaning, when mmthere is an increased risk of high-speed 3 in/ 0.12 below depths tread At mm. in/1.6 0.063 tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of exam for although, mm, 3 The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ depth tread Minimum thein tread. theCheck depth. tread ofsigns damage and for foreign objects lodged your tread frequently tires for Inspect wear, Tire condition buildup andpossible tire failure. arately or in combination, can cause heat underinflation,or excessive loading, either sep- inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, required bylaw. test wheel minimum laboratory thanthe representhigher levels performance of the on cle Safety StandardNo.109. Grades B and A tires meetmust under Federal the Motor Vehi- established forestablished atire thatis properly The temperature grade for this tire is ple, European legisla-ple, European < reached. beenhas mm in/1.6 tread depth of 0.063 has been driven down to the wear indicators, a Indicator.the If tire tread Wear – Tread with TWI ference and are marked on the side of the tire to arrow, distributedare the over tire's circum- Wear indicators at the refer base, tread-groove occupants and other road users. candamage beextremely dangerousto vehicle have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire respondingly trained personnel. Ifnecessary, according toBMW repair procedures with cor- center or BMW tire shopthatworks nearest oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the topulltendency tothe left right. or astrong as such inresponse, vehicle changes kinds of problems may also be signaled by other ple, becaused by driving over curbs. These some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- vehicle operationcan indicate tire failure or Unusual vibrations encountered during normal ages. tible toroad hazards and consequential dam- suscep- more be to parts suspension and tires that Please note cause tires low-profile wheels, Wheel/tire damage ately and have wheels and tires thor- tires and wheels have and ately In these cases, reduce speed immedi- < as possible. as soon as vehicle the on remounted combination the have andtire tire original damage, wheel Following manufacturer. asingle from uration only ofa tires use single tread response, config- vehicle and handling good maintain To wise be impaired, e.g. ABSorDSC. other- would function whose systems various The correct wheel/tire combination also affects bination center. at your BMW can You theinquire rightabout wheel/tire com- safety. therefore cannot be held liable for driving their suitability, cannotevaluate BMW and ity. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, that they load-carrying asufficient have capac- ensure also tires, the selecting When dents. acci- severe risk with the of it contact,and body approvedthese– units differences could lead to actually have different dimensions than the could identical with tires official ratings size turing tolerances mean that even wheels and vehicle. Variations in factors such manufac- as has tested and approved for your particular limited service life. a in result can which age, their in variations wide bly different tire casing structures and the often impaired. The causes for this include the possi- anced. hazards. Make sure that the newwheels are bal- ger of subsequent damage and related safety is work out not carried there properly, is adan- with correspondingly trained personnel. If this works according to BMWrepair procedures The right wheelsand tires Retreaded tires wheels New and tires wheel and tire combinations that BMW BMW recommends that you use only retreaded tires, as driving safety may be use you recommend that not does BMW by your BMWcenter or tire shop that Have new wheels and tires installed only < < < 203

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Wheels and tires dents. damageoccur,tire may whichresult can inacci- happy to advise you on you toadvise thison subject. happy Recommended tirebrands refer topage cannotdetectTire Pressure aflat tire,Monitor wheels electronics, with TPM otherwise the summer towinter tires or vice versa, only use converting tires or mounting from new When Monitor Pressure Tire TPM for electronics with Wheels Paying attention to speed to attention Paying winter tires. as performance cold-weather of levels same tires, they generally fail summer the to provide better winter tires provide traction than M+S winter driving conditions. Although all-season BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold Special characteristics of winter tires vehicle response. and safety for standards demanding most the When used properly, these tires comply with tirethe sidewall. these from the clearly visible BMWmarking on depending onthe tire size. You canrecognize Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise Always observethepermissi- maximum < 204 84 . Your BMW center . BMW bewill Your change is not permissible. the tire. the inflation pressure indicated onthe side wall of and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire all tires contactwith against oil, grease protect Always tolight little aspossible. exposure as placewith dry in tires acool, and wheels Store Storage clutch the from briefly. opening and closing noticeable be may This driving. during ually will automatically learn the changed state grad- If you do not carry outinitialization, system the 2. 1. Reinitialize the system for this purpose: becomemust familiar with the changed state. Transmission ofthe Manual tion Sequential changing theAfter wheels, tires slip or detec- After changing wheels/tires of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains with the mounted. km/h mph/50 of 30 mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed Observe the manufacturer's instructions when wheels. the rear on 18 R 245/45 size the of is permitted Use in only with winter pairs, tires mation. infor- more for center your BMW Consult them. recommends and road-safe as them classifies BMW only tests certain Snow chains* types and makes different of tires With the handling characteristics may be impaired. wheelsrearor the to vice versa,otherwise as notrecommenddoes BMW moving the front axlesRotating wheels between onds. Pull bothshift paddles forapprox. 2 sec- km/h. mph/150 90 km/hand mph/30 speed between 20 a ofroad Nonastraight stretch at position lever the selector the into Move idling fine-link snow chains, chains, fine-link snow * such a a such After changing wheels/tires.After to refer system, the reinitialize this, do To state. mission must become familiar with the altered slip detection Sequential ofthe Trans- Manual mountingAfter orremoving snow chains, the incorrect displays can occur. specifications. chainaccordancemanufacturer's withthe ficiently tensioned. in Retighten needed as suf- always are chains snow that the sure Make tialize Flat the Tire Monitor, otherwise After mounting snow chains, donotini- < 205

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Under the hood ards. subsequent damage and related safety haz- not carried out properly, there is a danger of respondingly trained personnel. If this work is according toBMW repair procedures with cor- works that center aworkshop or BMW your follow, have workonyour vehicle doneonly by proceduresrepair to what know not youdo If the required professional technical training. Under thehood Press the release handle and open the hood. Opening Pull lever. Releasing Hood < repair operations onyour vehicle without service or any toperform attempt Never You cannot start offwith cannotstart You hoodopen. the 206 < should stop at once and close it securely. pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you thatthe If you signs is notcom- any hood see result. engage. to cmwith momentum. It must beclearly heard 40 in/ from hood a the height ofapprox. Close 16 Closing hood hood is clear, otherwise injuries may the of path closing the that sure Make < 2 3 5 4 Engine compartment 1 Expansion tankfor Starting-aid terminal, refer topage terminal, refer Starting-aid page page and windshield cleaning systems, refer to Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp Body ground/negativeterminal digengine oil, page Adding Filler neck forengine oil, refer to 211 64 coolant, refer to 210 224 207

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Under the hood taken. make itcanimpossible for measurement a to be distance driving ora very sporty driving style short- Constant temperature. atoperating is The oil level can bedisplayed when the engine level check. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil Checking engine oillevel driving style and driving conditions. The engine oil consumption is dependent on Engine oil Press the button the Press 4 3 2 1 instrument cluster. the in level oil current the display can You Displaysin instrument cluster after each engine start. taken is automatically measurement A new The oil level must be between the two marks. appears in the instrument cluster. level oil the for display the until repeatedly BC button BC Minimum marking Maximum marking Oil level will be shown in the lower display. lower the in shown be will Manual transmission: the engine oil level 208 4 in turn the signal lever < Possible displays 5 4 3 2 1 Engine is not yet at operating temperature. operating at yet not is Engine canbe No value determined at this time. result if muchtoo oil has been added. high too level Oil damage. lead engine to may engineadd oil immediately. so Failure do to If the oil level displayed is below minimum, correctly. level control may not display the newvalue liter. Otherwise the oil quart/0.5 US 0.5 Adding engine oil below Addat least engine oil at the next liter of US quart/1 Add a maximum of 1 Oil level at minimum: minutes. 30 up to take can oil level the of measurement topped If theoff, the oil engine been has surface. levelstoppeda on minute when This process takes about 1 determined. being is level Oil OK level Oil ately, otherwise engine damage may Have the vehicle checked immedi- opportunity, referto < 3. 2. 1. 4. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. degree of measuring accuracy. lower a oil, with but adding engine after e.g. ally, current determine the can also oil manu- level In you tothe measurement, addition automatic Fast measurement iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage Displaying viaiDrive selected and press the controller. is sources" "Info until controller the Turn menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Service Info" is displayed. minute the current oil level is After approx. 1 is displayed during themeasurement. symbol clock A determined. is level oil The seconds. atleast the buttonfor 2 Press BC shown in the instrument cluster. is display level oil the until repeatedly the button Press BC on the turn leversignal engine Allow the atidle.to run position. tal rupted driving, parkth uninter- of km miles/10 6 least at after i.e. With the engine at operating temperature, e vehicle in a horizon- 16 . > > > > > messagesPossible 6. 5. val for engine oil": "Please observe recalculated service inter- result if too much oil has been added. been has oil much too if result "Engine oil level too high" too level oil "Engine may lead to engine damage. add engine oil immediately. Failure to doso If the oil level displayed is below minimum, correctly. level control display not new value may the oil the Otherwise liter. quart/0.5 US 0.5 least at below.oilAdding engine Add engine oil atthe next opportunity, refer to liter of quart/1 US Add a maximum1 of oil.":of engine quart 1 with Refill minimum! the at level "Oil minutes. 30 up to take can level oil the of measurement off,the If oil been engine topped has the ing. minutesdriv- while running5 approx. and stopped onalevel surface with theengine minute when process cantakeapprox. 1 Engine oil level is being measured. This oil levelengine measurement...": Updating available: measurement "No O.K." level oil "Engine ler. The oil level is displayed. is level oil The ler. control- the press and selected is level" oil necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine totheChange second field from topifthe selected and press the controller. controller until "Service requirements" is Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the ately, otherwise engine damage may Have the vehicle checked immedi- 209 * : <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Under the hood vent health risks. pre- to containers the on warnings the observe Keep oil,childrenof greaseetc. reach of out and water. and soap with contact with oil be should thoroughly washed into come that any areas reason, skin this For added andadded toupdate the display. Adding oil engine personnel. repair procedures with correspondingly trained aworkshop that works accordingat toBMW oil onlyHave changed atyour center or BMW Oil change currentthe oil level. wise the oil level check cannot reliably display liter of oil, USquart/0.5 other- Add at least0.5 oil. much too erwise theengine may be damagedbyadding ofoil, liter oth- US quart/1 of 1 Add a maximum sage is also shown on the Control Display. the oil level measurement. In this area a mes- US quarts/litersminimum of 0.0 is displayed by Do not add oil until a value slightly above the system checkedsoon as possible. as Service requirements on page to service, refer change nextuntilthe oil age drive, note the recalculated remaining mile- oil. engine Beforecontinuingnot add to Do caused cancer in laboratory testing. Continuous exposure toused oil has adding engine oil to check the oil quantity oil quantity the to check oil engine adding Please conduct fasta measurement after otherwise theengine could be damaged. Add oil withinthe next 125miles/200 km, 210 < < < 69 . Have the . Have is specified in SAE grades. rating and oil's flow of an a is measure Viscosity Viscosity grades www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information. at the website or visit 1-800-831-1117 at America ofNorth also call BMW can You oils. mance Synthetic Oil orapproved synthetic in its vehicles with extensive testing. cific oils after confirming their suitability for use an engine. BMWcontinuously approves spe- significance for the operation and service life of qualityThe engine the of oil selected has critical Approved engine oils happy to recommend a suitable oil. below –4 operated for a longer period at temperatures ent temperatures. However, if the vehicle is vehicle model can be used at virtually all ambi- The oilsfrom the usedby BMW factory for your ambient Low temperatures > > specifications: following the with oils use Only synthetic oilsother oil between changes. can quantities of you small unavailable, add If BMWHigh Performance Synthetic Oil is Alternative oilgrades API SJ/CF, or API SK/CF higher Specification 10W-50 SAE or 5W-50 SAE 10W-40, alternative: SAE 10W-60; preferred: SAE Viscosity < 10W-60. oils Approved gradebelong tothe SAE detailed questions on BMWHigh Perfor- Your BMW center will be happy toanswer result in engine damage. these oil as may additives, notuse Do 7 /–20 < 6 , your BMWcenter will be < posing of coolant additives. ofcoolant posing tions on the onthe tions containers. the hazard; instruc- present observe a health additives. suitable for center BMW your Ask BMW. your for suitable are additives available Notall commercially additive. coolant a and water parts of equal composed is Coolant can cause burns. Coolant 3. 2. 1. coolantlevelChecking 6. 5. 4. to the drawing next to the filler neck.filler the to next drawing the to theof fillerthe upperedge neck,refer also height as same is atthe float rod ofthe end The coolant level is correct whentheupper open. continuesure turning then to escape, to pres- accumulated any toallow clockwise counter- expansionof the tank theTurn cap cooled down. the notopen hooduntilDo the has engine nated as soon aspossible. assoon nated theelimi- loss for the coolant reason Have Turn the cap until there is an audible click. the specified level – do not overfill. upto coolant add slowly low, is coolant If the mental protection regulations when dis-mental protection regulationswhen Comply with the appropriate environ- engine damage may result. The additives otherwise additives, suitable use Only when the enginehot. is Escapingcoolant cooling system the to addcoolant not Do < < < 211

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Maintenance > > > > > BMW maintenancesystem BMW Maintenance deadlines, refer to page mandated legally and intervals maintenance remaining distances and times of selected toshow the Display canset Control You the basis for trouble-free driving. own individual requirements, the system builds and maintenance regimen thatreflects your service a define you letting By requirements. service future current and the determine to this uses Service Based Condition account. into BMW your of conditions driving ent and algorithms the take Sensors special differ- Condition CBS Based Service value. prove anasset of inestimable tobe will history dealer service acomplete BMW, your Should the daycomewhen youdecide tosell the ideal service for your vehicle. providing by maintenance economical ensure to is objective ultimate The BMW. your of preservation of the traffic and operating safety The BMW maintenance system supports the on local regulations inspectionsLegallydepending mandated Vehicle check Brake fluid separately rear and front pads, Brake oil Engine 212 69 : for Canadian models and Service Guide Booklet Warranty Booklet forUS modelsand Serviceand Warranty Information ensured. not is Service Based Condition CBS of service. vice Advisor when you takeyour vehicle in for control you last used to drive theto BMWSer- cle.You should therefore hand over the remote serviceproceduresindividual for yourown vehi- Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of Service BMW your control, remote the in stored trol during driving. the accessing data After continuously thein remote con- maintenance Your vehiclestoresthe information required Service data in remote control fied regularmaintenance. verify that your vehicle has received the speci- Booklet for Canadian models. These entries modelsfor and US Warranty Service and Guide Booklet Information Warranty and Service cle's cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- pro- service thatthese time toensure the Take center.BMW ments. require- service on information additional for and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for andWarranty US models Booklet mation Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- to page to the correctly, refer set is sure date Make andrepair operations performed at your service recommendsyou have that BMW < 76 , otherwise the effectiveness < within a few days. cap is the tightened, thethen will display goout fuel vapor escapes. Thena display lights up. If cially the catalytic converter, within time. a short espe- emission-relevant components, to the damage serious causes misfiring engine Heavy the nearest BMWcenter as soon as possible. this youshould case reduceand drive speed to aexcessiveisof sign misfiring the of engine.In lamp flashesThe undercertainconditions. This Diagnostics interface Socket for OBD Onboard Exhaust-gas values Exhaust-gas under a cover. side, on the underside theof instrument panel driver's the on left the to islocated socket This the OBD socket with a device. exhaust-gas composition can be checked via which decisive the are for Components ened, the OBD system will assume that If the fuel filler capis notproperly tight- malfunction in Canadian models. described previously the of Display vehicle checked as as soon possible. exhaust-gas values worsen. Have the The warning lamp lights up. The < for your vehicle brochure. nance ofyour BMWis contained in theCaring Important information on the care and mainte- Care services. sponding be transmitted orrecorded toenable corre- can data vehicle certain Assist, BMW to scribed vehicle or data information. If youhave sub-also or certain for device transmitting recording a eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev- Recorders Data Event 213

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Replacing components Onboard toolkit components Replacing 3. 2. 1. Wiper bladereplacement wing the nut Loosen to open. lid. compartment toolkit onboard The is located in luggagethe it is heard to engage.heardit to is Mount the newwiper blade and slide in until gage it. wiper towardfrontthe the blade todisen- while sliding together the tabs safety Press Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly. 214 ter. cen- your BMW please contact aim, headlamp Caring for your vehicle brochure. separate the in instructions the follow please For care andmaintenance of the headlamps, manufacturer. bulb the by provided instructions any observe equipment damage when replacing bulbs, occurring.from injury possible Toavoid or toprevent circuits short involved consumers your center. BMW selectionA of replacement is bulbsavailable at metal socket. clean cloth, napkin, etc.,or hold the bulb byits a Use life. itsservice and reduce surface bulb's burn will ofcontamination into the amounts not described here. is yourself that or perform to feel competent not your center BMW perform any work that you do in replacing them. BMW recommends having diligent duly be must You vehicle safety. to tion contribu- essential an make bulbs and Lamps bulbs and Lamps emitting diodes. 1 light- asClass designated are officially lasers, conventional in applied that to similar concept light-emitting diodes, which operate using a the controls and displays in your vehicle. These cent lenses serve theas light source for many of Light-emitting diodes behindinstalled translu- Light-emitting diodes LEDs < described, and for checking and adjusting not is changing which for bulbs For systems/ offthe turn system, electrical Whenever you perform any work on the burned. be may you wise Only replace bulbs when cool, as other- your bare fingers, as even minute touch with glass ofnew the bulbs Never < < < hours, asirritation retina couldhours, result. ofthe work is carried out improperly. system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the procedures with correspondingly trained per- workshop that works according to BMWrepair number of times. on that they are offanunusual notswitched and provided low, very is failure a of probability the The service life of these bulbs is very long and Xenon lamps > > To removethe covers: 2 1 engine compartment. the of side left-hand the shows illustration The Access to lamps left and remove. and left turnTurning lamps: the cap sealing to the to the and left remove. cap cover the turn lamps: running daytime Parking lamps and roadside parkinglamps, Sealing capfor turning lamps lamps running daytime lamps, Cover cap for parking and roadside parking stare into the unfiltered light for several notremoveDo thecovers, and never performed only byyour BMWcenter or a Have work on the xenon lighting system < * < Turning lamps* 2. 1. bulb,H8 watts 35 lamps running daytime lamps, Parking lamps and roadside parking 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. bulb,H3 watts 55 bulb. Remove the connector and replace the remove. and side, other the direction on opposite the Turn bulb the in direction the ofthe arrow, in on the bulb when doing so. markings the cap.Watch sealing Mount the the connector. Reconnect Fold down thelocking bar andengageit. Replace the bulb and reinstall. bulb. connector outthethe andtake Remove upward. fold and anchor Push the locking tothe bar outofthe side lamps. to cap, toAccess sealing refer the Remove 215

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Replacing components 1. bulb, PY21W 21-watt signals,Turn front sonnel. procedures with correspondingly trained per- workshop that works according to BMWrepair To replace, please gotoyour BMWcenter or a rear and front lamps, marker Side 1. bulb, W5W 5-watt Side-mounted turn signals 2. 3. 2. Turn theholder bulb left to the remove. and out. it pivot finger, then ofyour tip the with lamp ofthe front the backagainst edge Press ment. turning it the to leftfor removal and replace- Apply gentle pressure tothe bulb while Remove the bulb for replacement. Turn theholder bulb left to the remove. and 216 > Tail lamps 2. 1. fitting. bulb central a into integrated are bulbs the All cargo bay. The illustration shows the left-hand side of the Fender-mounted lamps ingly trained personnel. ing toBMWrepair procedures with correspond- accord- works that aworkshop or center BMW In the event of a malfunction, please go to your operation. for technology LED uses lamp This lamp brake Center 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 > > Turn signals side panel andpull out the panel. Undo the quick-release fasteners of the floor mat. up Lift Side marker lamp lamp Tail Reflector Brake lamp Backup lamp Tail lamp and brake lamp Turn signal P21W bulb, 21-watt lamps: Other W16W bulb, 16-watt lamps: Backup with correspondingly trained personnel. works according to BMW repair procedures that center aworkshop or to your BMW ogy. In the event of a malfunction, please go lamps 7 are designed using LED technol- 1 , tail lamps tail , 6 and side marker 3. 1. C5W bulb, 5-watt plate License lamp Lamps in luggage compartment lid 4. 2. holder. Turn the to lock leftthe and the bulbremove lamp. the right, refer to arrows. This releases the to press and slot the into screwdriver Insert ment. turning it to the left for removal and replace- whilebulb pressureApply gentle the to Other lamps: Remove and replace the bulb. Backup lamps: Remove the lamp and replacelampRemovethe and the bulb. lamp lations. cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu- ofthe rear vehi- from the distance appropriate If a warningtriangle aguardrail.behind as such place, asafe in area immediate the side vehicleof the and ensure thatthey remain out- reverseall vehicle gear.Have out occupants get Apply the handbrake and engage the first or flashers. warning hazard the passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on driving. continue then and pressure the inflation tire area, restore damaged off the seal tire, inside ofthe the in asealant can apply vided in the BMWM5. Using this system you Mobility System is pro- To repair a flat tire, an M Mobility System M Repairing flat tire with bottle and apply it to the steering wheel. sealant offthe limit the speed for sticker Pull the bottle. device.the tire the possible. etrated if Do notremove foreign bodies which have pen- bay under the floorpanel flap. cargo the in located is System Mobility M The Preparation * park the vehicle as far as possible from Safety measures in observe the information on the sealant sealant the on the information observe Mobility System, Before using the M Mobility System are also provided on M Corresponding information onusing the is required, set it up on the roadside at an < < < * or portable hazard warning warning hazard portable or 217 case ofabreakdown:

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Replacing components h Mobility System consists of The M stored in the compressor housing. Connector, cable andconnecting hose are 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 hose* gaugeon pressure with Model 2 1 wheel and compressor bottle or sealant and sor Connecting hose for connecting compres- inflation pressure Screw on pressure gauge for reducing tire pressure Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation switch On/Off Compressor forMounting sealing bottle Connector and cable for lighter socket bottle towheel sealant from Filling hose bottle limit with and sticker speed Sealant sealant bottle. sealant Please observe the best-by date on the 218 < 3. 2. 1. could escape. > stored onunderside ofcompressor. stored Connector, cable and connecting hose are 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 housing* in Model with pressure gauge integrated > Filling sealant into wheel > follows: as proceed Mobility System, tire aflat To repair M with the Using Mobility M System Make sure that screw that sure Make For model with pressure gauge on hose: bottle. Screw hose bottle. sealant Shake is closed. page to refer pressure, inflation tire Produce wheel and compressor bottle or sealant and sor Connecting hose for connecting compres- Button for reducing tire inflation pressure pressure Pressure gauge for indicating tire inflation switch On/Off Compressor forMounting sealing bottle Connector and cable for lighter socket Distribute sealant, refer to page to refer sealant, Distribute Fill sealant into wheel, refer topage wheel, sealant Fill into otherwise highly pressurized sealant Strictly withcomply the specified order, 219 . < 9 onto connection ofsealant 8 onpressure gauge 219 218 . . 4. 3. 2. 1. Producing tire inflation pressure possible. if km/h mph/20 12 issealant evenly indistributed tire. km so that miles/3 2 approx. drive Immediately Distributing sealant 5. 7. 6. 10. 9. 8. and screw filling hose filling screw and capdustScrew offvalve defective of wheel cle interior. Insert connector valve. Screw compressor hose location. atsuitable stop km, miles/3 approx. 2 After ing so that it is positioned upright. positioned is it that so ing hous- compressor on bottle sealant Insert onto valve. Insert connector 0. position off, is device switched the that sure Make vehicle interior, refer to page again. Mobility System in the vehicle Stow the M valve. bottle tire and of sealant Remove connecting hose fromconnection Switch off device. filling. after has tire the It is not important what inflation pressure tofill with sealant. wheel minutes approx. 3 Switch onthe device and allow torun for With ignitionthe switched on: 5mh6 km/h. Do not drop below mph/60 35 Do not exceed a maximum speed of 3 3 into lighter socket in in lighter socket in vehi- in socket lighter in 2 of sealant bottle bottle sealant of < 9 directly ontotire 108 . possible. Mobility System replaced as soon as the M the bottle tire of Have defective sealant the and reverse with the manual transmission, or move move or with the transmission, reverse manual the handbrake Apply into and shift gear first or flashers.warninghazard the ground. Switchon far as possible frompassing traffic and on solid accidentsoccur. can Changing wheels* Continue driving tinue driving. Mobility System. M ready made fornot be driving with the respondingly trained personnel ifthe tire can- according toBMW repair procedures with cor- refer to page mm. Please contact the nearest BMWcenter, 4 from with tire damage Mobilityineffectivebe System can Usingthe M once. 4 1 to steps repeat Then sealant. 4. > aged. the device will overheat and may be dam- > on: ignition switched the With kPa. 200 psi/ Correct tire inflation pressure 29 to For details, refer page details, refer to For Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as ofaflat event in the precautions Safety km/h, otherwise mph/80 speed of 50 Do not exceed the permissible maximum 9pi20kPa. Otherwise do not con- psi/200 29 atleast be must pressure inflation tire The vehiclethe again, toDistributingrefer drive held, not is pressure inflation the If button Reduce inflation pressure: press gauge. switch off device. briefly pressure, inflation set rently cur- check To I. position compressor, on switch pressure: inflation Increase < < ogrta 0minutes, otherwise longer than10 torun notallow compressor Do < 224 8 or turn screw , or a workshop that works thatworks , or aworkshop < < ieo prx .6in/ 0.16 ofapprox. a size 219 8 83 onpressure .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Replacing components lamp If a warningIf a triangle guardrail. a asbehind place, such asafe area in diate imme- outside remain the that ensure and they Have all vehicle occupants get outof the vehicle transmission. sequential lever adrive selector withinto the the position supported bythe jack. the vehicle, never and start the engine while it is To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under capacity. load-carrying its reduce it from extending to its full support height and for jack,asthis would the prevent base support a as object similar or block a wooden not use Do the surface. onafirmPosition support jack snow, ice, tiles, etc. as such surface slippery or soft a on vehicle the raise to attempt you if side the to slip could which is not slippery. Thevehicle or the jack Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface lations. regu- and guidelines safety all with Comply cle. appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi- wheel. spare the of hollow the in located are tools The 3 2 1 pleting work. com- their after initial them to return positions then them, removing before tools ofthe tions rattlingTo noises theavoid later on,note posi- What you will need Lug wrench Vehicle jack Chock * is required, set it up on the roadside at an an at roadside the on up it set required, is * 220 * * * orportable hazard warning < Preparing wheel changePreparing wheel 1. wheel*Spare 1. vehicleJacking up 3. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. Pull back lock back Pull cause accidents and personal injury.accidentscause personal and kind. so could any ofany Todo load raise anotherto raise vehicle with it model or to perpendicularly beneath the jacking point. ground the on rests base jack the of face thatthe wheel closest tothe sur-so entire jackingthe point jack at vehicle the Position turn. half a bolts lug the Loosen rolling. against vehicle the secure always roads, in front of this wheel. steeply On inclined the other side of the vehicle, or on inclines, Place the chock behind the front wheel on Prevent the vehicle from rolling: above. precautions safety the Observe Remove the spare wheel. necessary. beltthe and stow in net the bagincluded if tire form spare the mount the tool Remove theRemove cover completelyandbelt loosen the changing only. wheels not attempt Do The vehicle jack is designed for 1 , fold open tensioning lock tensioning , fold open 4 . 3 . < 2

2. 1. After mounting 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. wheel a Mounting 3. 2. up, refer detail. toillustration ofthe recess jacking when crankingpoint theGuide into jackhead rectangular the iheigtru s8. bf/2 Nm. ft/120 lb 88.5 is tightening torque The risk. safety a hidden are bolts lug ened incorrectlyfied torque. Otherwise, tight- thattheyensure are tightened to the speci- to as possible as soon wrench torque Tighten the lug bolts in adiagonal pattern. vehicle.beneath the the vehicleLower jack the andremove from pattern. diagonal a in securely bolts the Screw in theremaining lug bolts. Tighten all bolts mayalso berequired. ine BMWlight-alloy wheels, different lug Genu- than other wheels mount you When lug bolts into opposite bolt holes. Secure the by wheel screwing atleast two Position the new wheel or spare wheel. hub.clean Alsothe lugbolts. the mounting surfaces of the wheel and Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from wheel. Unscrew the lug bolts andremove the changing is raised fromthe ground. Jack the vehicle upuntil the wheel you are at the earliest opportunity. correctCheck and tire the inflationpressure lug bolts checked with bolts acalibrated lug the have always safety, To ensure < possible. as assoon remounted wheel be mal should nor- originalthe state, the torestore However, equivalent to them in all load and speed ranges. that of the other wheels. The spare wheel is 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Stowingand wheel tools Driving with spare wheel 8. 7. 4. 3. Thread thebelt tensioningCompletely the open lock. Hook the belt into the lashing eyes 5. eyes lashing Center the wheel and cover relative to the cover the Lay onthe mounting. the mounting. wheel tool the in Lay the protruding belt end. Fold the tensioning lock closed andstow times. lock by opening andclosing thelock several Tighten the firmlybelt with the tensioning sion it byhand. tensioning lock twisting itwithout andten- ble and have the newwheel/tire balanced. aspossi- soon as tire damaged the Replace tires onpage changing wheels/ refer to After mission, page Initialize Flat the Tire Monitor, to refer of gradual air loss. of gradual tion. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source the size of the spare wheel differs from from differs wheel ofthe spare size the combinations wheel-and-tire certain With < 83 seal caps against dirt and contamina- and dirt against caps seal Protect valve stems with valve stem , and the Sequential Manual Trans- Manual Sequential the , and 5 204 . 3 through the axis . < 221 6 ofthe

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Replacing components over during over transport. it tipping battery toprevent the from restrain Always storage. transport and for position cling center. Maintain the inbattery anupright > > > Charging battery in battery. the concerning matters all advise to glad be will center BMW Your mate. when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- the will for ofthe last life electrolyte battery i.e., the maintenance-free, 100% is battery The Battery care Vehicle battery > steps: following the Take lost. are settings some interruption, supply power atemporary After Power failure Disposal Jump starting on page refer to off.Connections, switched engine with the in compartment engine the terminals charge battery inOnly the the viavehicle the page refer untilto Wait thestarts, system system Navigation topage refer again, stations Store Radio refer onpage totext starting Reset, date Time and Store the positions again, refer the refer again, Store positions to page Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory BMW BMW center orhandthem in to a recy- ofby batteries disposed old your Have 122 222 . < 224 . 154 75 . . 43 . the onboard tool tool refer onboard the kit, to page diagram for in are tion thelocated compartment alloca- fuse and tweezers plastic fuses, Spare vehicle. the in fire a in resulting this could lead to a circuit ultimately overload, rating, as amperage ofanother color or stitute 2. 1. compartment glove In Fuses 2. 1. In cargobay Fold the cover forward or remove. fasteners. quick-release both Release right side panel andpull outthepanel. Release the quick-release fastener of the floor mat. up Lift do not replace a defective fuse with asub- with fuse adefective notreplace do fuse torepair ablown and attempt Never < 214 . contract. center after tivated aBMW signing by a new possible. The BMW Assist system can be reac- been deactivated, emergency requests are not has system Assist BMW the Once workshop. center having without a you a BMW tovisit canbe deactivated by system Assist BMW the expires, subscription Assist yourOnce BMW > > > > > Conditions for an emergency request: request Emergency and receivingassistance Giving 1. request an emergency Initiating Center has been established, the LED flashes. Response Assist BMW the to connection voice in buttonligh the LED The 2. ble. The emergency request system is opera- mobile phone network. toa on is logged system Assist BMW The activated. is readiness Radio topage refer Assist, BMW Activating activated. is Assist BMW paired in the vehicle. is still possible when nomobile phoneis With this equipment, an emergency request Full preparation packagemobile phone. lamps may differ somewhat. arrangement of the switches and indicator Depending onthe vehicle's equipment, the Briefly press protective cover toopen. onds. buttonfor the 2 Press sec- at SOS least ts up. As soon as the the as soon As up. ts 194 . Loosen the the nutwing toopen. Loosen lid. compartment luggage the in located is triangle warning The Warning triangle* page tions. cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi- For technical reasons, the emergency request pressed. thenotification is not by buttonbeing affected collision automatic The accident. asevere after request initiatedis automatically immediately emergencyconditions,Under certain an Center, however. Response Assist BMW the by heard be still may You malfunctioning. is system hands-free hands-free system, it is possible that the Response Center cannot beheard over the Assist BMW flashing is If thebut the LED Center. Response Assist determined, will it be tothetransmitted BMW If the current ofyourposition vehicle can be situation.the then ablebe toprovide a descriptiondetailed of the connection has been established. You will until vehicle the in remain allow, conditions If to help youunder certain conditions. steps further take can Center Response Assist Even if you are unable to answer, the BMW 189 BMW Assist with button,refer this to Assist BMW You can also use other services of . < 223

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Giving and receiving assistance Loosen the wing the nut Loosen to open. partment lid. first-aidThe kit is located in luggagethe com- necessary. replace the contents concerned in good time if oftheexpiration regularlydates contents and have a limited service life. Therefore, check the of the articlesSome contained in the first-aid kit First-aid kit* components whilecomponents the engine is running. Care- handles. clamp fully-insulated another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with tohelp start method same use the can also from battery in vehicle. the asecond power You with your tostart cables jumper BMW two yourWhen battery is discharged, youcan use Jump starting refer topage the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive, in for assistance Group BMW ofthe Assistance Roadside the contact can you Assist BMW With brochure.Contact countryinfoundbetance inthe yourhome can The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis- and public holidays. including clock, onweekends the around down ofabreak- the event in assistance you offers Group BMW ofthe Assistance Roadside The Roadside Assistance* always avoid all contact with electrical electrical with all contact avoid always injury, fatal ofpotentially the avoid risk To 224 190 . 3. 2. 1. +. The cover cap is marked with a engine compartment overview on page refer to the for also terminal battery, positive in as serves a theterminal compartment engine M5, so-calledthe jump-starting In your BMW jumper cables. there is a danger of shorting. Connecting jumper cables jumper Connecting 3. 2. 1. Preparation guard against possible personal injuries. possible against guard to both vehicles, and or to one damage prevent fully adhere tothe bothto sequence, following ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. be to vehicle the of terminal ing-aid or ofthe to a start- positive battery terminal end second cableAttach the ofthe tothe assistance. ing provid- vehicle ofthe terminal jump-starting a or battery of the terminal positive the to Attach one endof the jumper cable plus/+ pull terminal. Todoso, starting tab. the Fold open the cover of the BMWjump- ponents inboth vehicles. Switch off any electrical systems and com- cle. vehi- engine the offthe Switch assisting of tery. This information can be found on the bat- approximately the same incapacitance Ah. Volts and voltage 12 a of vehicle has Check whether the battery of the other followconnectingsequence this when injury sparks, personal from To avoid the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise contact between There must any not be < < 207 < . towed. 4. Tow-starting andtowing if necessary. recharge battery and the Check 4. 3. 2. 1. engine Starting 5. ground negative terminal. or asbody nut aspecial has M5 BMW Your vehicle. an engine or ground body of the assisting or battery terminal ofthe to the to negative Attach one endof the jumper cable minus/– the connection sequence. Disconnect the jumper cables byreversing Let theengines run for fewa minutes. recharge. in discharged order battery toallow to the attempt another before minutes few a wait successful, not is attempt starting first If the usual way. theStart engine onthe vehicleother in the at slightly increased speed. minutes several for idle at run to it allow and vehicle theStart onthe engine assisting started. engine or body ground of the vehicle tobe ofthe tothe battery or negative terminal second ofthe the totheAttach end cable than the driver in a vehicle that is being other passengers any transport not Do towing. and tow-starting for regulations and laws applicable Observe engine. the tostart fluids spray use Never < < < the enginestopped, is there ispowerassist. no steering the can turn left right.to the or When as otherwise raised, axle rear the with vehicle wipers would nottow available. Do notbe the beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield tow fittingtow andthe vehicle can occur. the to damage fitting. Otherwise tow the bycle vehi-lift the do not e.g. fitting, tow of the loading lateral Avoid roads. only on fitting towing for tow Being towed Rear Front bumper. onthe the cover in symbol the Press arrow Access to screw thread partment lid, refer topage It is in located the in toolkit the luggage com- BMW. of the vehicle. Itcan in screwed be at front the rearor fitting tow the screw-in with keep the Always Using tow fitting refer to page on, the is ignition switched that sure Make vehicleand screw itall the way in. Use the only the with the fittingUse tow provided 56 , otherwise the low 225 214 . <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Giving and receiving assistance a a sign orwarning triangle in therear window. mark fails, vehiclethe tem towed, with tobe e.g. the localing on regulations.If the electrical sys- Switch on thehazard warning flashers depend- and steering. braking for effort increased requires then This lead to damage. > > angle, please observe the following: atanoffset bar the tow mounting ble to avoid side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- should onthe fittingsbe used tow same The response. will not be possible to reliably control vehicle country. respective yourselfize with the regu ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar- or bars tow with towing countries, some In result. towing. otherwise theengine can be damagedduring Gearshift lever in neutral position. transmission Manual With tow bar Towing methods Drivelogic Sequential Manual Transmission with vehicle sideways. lateral exert tending topushthe forces, When mounted at angle, an the tow bar will be sharply limited during cornering. Clearance and maneuvering capability will as attachmentas toother vehicle parts can attachthe bar Only tow to the fittings, tow than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it it otherwise towed, be to vehicle the than towing The vehicle lighternot be may may damage otherwise parts, chassis and not liftDo vehicle fitting tow by body or with theengaged ignition switched on,as is N position lever selector that sure Make < < < 226 < < lations on towing in the on towing lations face only. face vehicle sur- the transportedHave onaflatbed tothe left right.turn or engine maybedamagedor the steering can 4. 3. With tow truck damage. vehicle toother canlead parts attachment to tothe fittings, ropes as tow attachtow Only alwaystowing, use nylon ropes or nylon straps. thatthe rope sure tow is taut. offin starting the vehicle, towing When make With tow rope 2. 1. transmission Manual with enginethe cold. verter, the vehicle should only be tow-started ing, refer topage start- of jump means by the engine start instead vehiclethe nottow-start ifDo but possible, Tow-starting depress the clutch again completely. theAfter starts, engine immediately depressed and slowly release the clutch. completely clutch the with Tow-start Shift into 3rd gear. Switch on the ignition, onthe Switch topage refer regulations. country-specific with comply flashers, warning hazard the on Switch or rear axle raised, as otherwise the the otherwise as raised, axle rear or vehicle only the front tow not the with Do stresses on vehicle components when the and associated jerking To avoid < 224 . acatalytic With con- < 56 . 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Drivelogic Transmission Manual Sequential with 6. 5. Have the vehicle checked. flashers. ing bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- the remove tow location, Stop atasuitable engaged automatically. The correct gearwill be selected and seconds. 2 within + toward pull and tion the Move into selector lever drive posi- the N. Tow-startin selector leverposition Switch onthe ignition, refer to page comply with country-specific regulations. Switch onthe hazard warning flashers, Have the vehicle checked. flashers. ing bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- the remove tow location, Stop atasuitable 56 . 227

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Reference

This chapter contains the technical data, the short commands of the voice command system, and the index that will direct you as quickly as possible to the information you are looking for. Technical data tegn pe p 6,100 7,750 500 383/520 rpm ft/Nm lb rpm hp speed engineat cu in/cm torque Maximum speed engineat Maximum output No. of cylinders Displacement Engine data Technical data 230 μ 305.1/4,999 M5 10 Dimensions All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 40.7 ft/12.4 m 231

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technical data ag a aaiyc tl17.7/500 1,058/480 220/100 2,800/1,270 4,012/1,820 2,403/1,090 5,071/2,300 cu ft/l lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg Cargo bay capacity capacity roofload Approved load axle rear Approved lbs./kg load axle front Approved Load Approved gross vehicle weight weight Curb ultn U a/iesapo.1./0Fuel grade: page For more details: page approx. 5.3/5 4/15 approx. approx. 18.5/70 quarts/liters US gal/liters US gal/liters US system washer Window and headlamp reserve that of Fuel tank Weights Capacities the gross vehicle weight. Never exceed either the approved axle loads or 232 Notes 199 M5 63 To open "Roadside Assistance" "Roadside To open To Contact open "BMW Numbers" Contact" To open"BMW To display To display "Bluetooth" To change scale in assistance window scale in assistance To change To openBMWService, Services To select the display in the assistance window assistance the in display the select To To open BMW Assist BMW open To calls" "Missed display To To display "Received calls" To display 8" "Top Communication Assistance window selected. tionsdirectly, regardless whichmenu item of is With short youcan commands run certain func- system command Short commandsofvoice To redial To select from thephone book To display book phone To dial phone number phone To open window the assistance open To Function Function 182 * 175 183 190 181 178 182 183 183 183 182 20 190 189 183 122 20 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { voicesystem. command are the Here thefor commands important short { { { { { { { Command Command Roadside Assistance BMW Contact numbers Contact BMW Assistance window current position current window Assistance Assistance window onboard info Assistance window trip computer Assistance window scale ...miles scale window Assistance ...feet scale window Assistance BMW Contact BMW serviceBMW Missed calls Assistance window perspective Assistance window arrow display Assistance window map facing north Bluetooth Assistance window map direction oftravel BMW AssistBMW Received calls Assistance window Redial 8 Top Dial number Phone Dial name A to Z Call ... Call } } } } } or } } } } }

} } } } } } 233 } } } , or } } } , or } , } , } ,

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Short commands of voice command system To display computer display To Onboard info To display destination list To display "Input map" destination""New open To To open "Enter address" system navigation open To Navigation To open "Car Data" "Car open To To To display route criteria To display address book To start destination guidance destination start To To To display map display To display arrow display To end destination guidance To change scale change To To displaytripTo computer To display roads or towns/cities along route along or towns/cities roads display To To switch on voice instructions voice on switch To To repeat voice instructions voice repeat To To switch off voice instructions To open route open To To open "New route" open To To open stopwatch open To To current position To display To activate speed limit speed To activate limit speed open To To deactivate speed limit speed deactivate To Function Function 234 74 68 73 68 74 69 74 122 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Command Command Navigation Car data list Destination map Input destinationNew Enter address Onboard info Onboard Route preference Address book Start guidance Start Map direction of travel Map Arrow display Stop guidance Perspective Scale ...miles Scale Trip computer Route list Route ...feetScale Navigation info on info Navigation Repeat navigation Repeat navigation info off info Navigation Route menu Route New route New Current position Limit on Limit Limit Stopwatch Limit off Limit } } , { Map facing north } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } or } } } } } } } } or } , To select a weatherband station weatherband a select To To switch on weatherband weatherband on switch To To open"WB" To open strongest radio stations To open"Manual" To open"Presets" To select preset radio station device audio external with playback audio on To switch changer To select a CD and music track in the CD To select music track CD changer in theselect To CD a To select radio station To open CD changerTo openCD To switch on CD changer CD switch on To To open"FM" To open"All stations" To open"AM" To switch on CD player CD switch on To To open "Categories" of radio of satellite "Categories" To open radio satellite of channels" "All open To To open CDplayer To switch on radio switch on To Tone control Entertainment To open "Presets" ofsatellite radio "Presets" To open radio satellite on switch To To open"SAT" Function 168 163 149 152 152 156 160 153 152 152 162 163 163 152 152 162 163 160 156 152 156 154 163 161 160 160 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Command Choose weatherband station weatherband Choose Weatherband on Weatherband menu AM Autostore Frequency ...Megahertz Frequency Choose frequencyChoose AM manual FM manual FM FM presets FM AM presetsAM Preset ... Audio Aux CD 1...6 CD CD track ... track CD Choose station Choose CD changer menu CD changer CD 1...6 track ... 1...6 CD AM Station ... Station FM all stationsFM AM menu CD FM FM menu FM SAT radio allSAT channels SAT radioSAT categories CD menu Radio on Radio Audio SAT radio presetsSAT SAT radioSAT menu SAT radio SAT } } } or } } } } } } } } , e.g. , e.g. , } } , e.g. } } } } } } , or or } } { } { } Preset 1 } } Station WNYC } } } , } } } } 235 } } } , or

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Short commands of voice command system To To open "Head-Up Display" To To set brightness of Control Display messages" Control "Check display To settings Service settings" "BMW To open "Service" open To To open "Service requirements" "Lighting" open To To open "Units" open To To open "Time" open To "Language" open To To open "Date" open To To open "PDC" open To To display "Bluetooth" display To "TPM" open To "FTM" open To heating for seat distribution front temperature To adjust Climate ooe h menu To open the programs" "Automatic To open settings" "Vent To open To "SteeringTo buttons" open wheel To open"Door locks" "Settings" open To To "Infoopen sources" off" "Display To activation times To display To open "Automatic ventilation" To "Parkedopen car ventilation" To open MDrive open To Function Function menu 47 236 21 * 78 76 83 85 75 76 50 69 63 77 , 30 191 178 , 99 , 122 32 102 89 98 102 69 102 50 , 76 191 72 193 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Command Command Service Head-up display Head-up Brightness Check Control messages service settings BMW Lighting Service requirements MDrive Units Language Date Time PDC TPM FTM Bluetooth Seat heater distribution Automatic programsAutomatic settings Vent Steering wheel buttons locks Door Settings menu Settings sources Info off Display Parked car operation Automatic ventilationAutomatic Activation time } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } 237

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z "..." Identifies Display Identifies Control "..." Index Everythingfrom Z Ato Activated-charcoal filter filter for Activated-charcoal toCheck refer signal, Acoustic toEmergency refer Accident, Accessories Accepted calls – indicator lamp ABS AntilockBrake A – storing– current position – storing selecting – "Activation time" for parked- for time" "Activation "Add digits""Add for mobile Light Head Adaptive to refer lamps, brake Adaptive key spare for Adapter seatventilation Active front restraints head Active "Address fornavigation book" engine– oil, refer toApproved – coolant Additives – entering – deleting Address for navigation in thein text. them tofind where indicates individual functions, and toselect used texts control climate automatic Control request System car ventilation car phone Brake force display system engine oils 182 131 101 211 131 71 223 79 133 124 132 238 6 210 , 182 127 81 102 94 87 28 47 132 44 Air automatic supply, climate "All doors" "All channels" "All sensor alarm – tilt alarm tilt off – switching alarm off – switching sensor motion – interior – avoiding unintentional system Alarm AKI, toFuel quality refer Air volume – AUC Automatic Automatic – AUC Air recirculation Ventilation to refer Airing, – manual – automatic Air distribution – sitting safely front for lamp – indicator – indicator/warning lamp Airbags unlocking" "After "After door opened" Adjusting thigh support theAdjusting during tone interior Adjusting active backrest Adjusting destination to "Add book" address to "Add "Air recirculation on/ recirculation "Air off" mode – recirculated-air control sensor andinterior motion sensor alarms recirculated-air control recirculated-air passenger airbags Tone control to operation, refer audio temperature width list" 127 43 87 36 36 97 99 , 99 128 30 98 35 160 41 98 149 44 35 88 44 35 131 100 42 35 199 89 100 50 101 All-season tires, refer to to refer tires, All-season Armrest, toCenter refer Armrest, vehicleApproved gross oilsApproved engine Approved axleloads, referto to refer system, Anti-theft refer system, alarm Anti-theft Antilock System Brake fluid – washer – coolant Antifreeze mobile phone Antenna for for Caring to refer Antenna, reception "AM", road stretch of Altering technical, to Alterations, refer "All stations", calling up with – refer to Starting destination Starting to refer – Computer to refer – Arrival time Around the steering wheel Around the center console – rear – front Ashtray "Arrow display pop-up "Arrow display" for navigation Winter tires armrest, rear armrest, refer toWeights weight, Weights Central locking system system to Alarm ABS your vehicle brochure range own safety For your radio guidance instructions" system 109 108 79 152 149 211 137 232 , 136 , 156 152 204 64 110 123 35 68 210 5 140 29 174 232 10 14 – refer to Automatic headlamp headlamp toAutomatic refer – lightingAutomatic curbAutomatic monitor closingAutomatic ofdoors, – ventilation in rear off and on switching – ventilation car parked – air distribution – automatic Automatic climate control – also refer to Caring for your washes car Automatic – storingstations – steeringwheel notification service – – headlampcontrol – air volume – air distribution Automatic Audio device, external – volume – tonecontrol on/off switching – – controls Audio "Audio" recirculated- Automatic AUC off" window "Assist. window Assistance to refer systems, Assistance to refer Assist, Automatic low beams, refer refer lowto beams, Automatic – refer to Welcome lamps lighting– toPathway refer – toInteriorrefer lamps – refer to High-beam – refer toDaytime running control closing soft toAutomatic refer vehicle brochure adjustment air control systems Driving stabilitycontrol Assist BMW High-beam assistant High-beam assistant lamps 148 93 149 92 149 33 148 79 94 100 , 98 151 43 149 189 98 , 154 148 156 101 92 20 21 191 101 107 116 94 101 96 48 92 97 93 98 Avoiding freeways for freeways Avoiding for highways" "Avoid navigation for ferries" "Avoid Average speed, refer to – setting units Average fuel consumption mode audio in IN" "AUX AUX-In connection "AUX" "A - Z" - "A to refer loads, Axle "Avoid tollroads" for Avoiding unintentional Backrestrefer contour, to "Backrest" B "Balance", refer to Tone Tone to refer "Balance", Backup lamps, replacing seats to Rear refer seats, Back Backrest width Seats to refer Backrests, Bass, toTone refer Bass, First-aid to refer Band-aids, "Bass", tone control tone "Bass", "Autostore" on the the on "Autostore" Request" "Auto automatic for program AUTO ventilation" "Automatic search station Automatic softclosing Automatic programs" "Automatic navigation navigation system system Computer Weights navigation system alarms Lumbar support control bulbs control kit radio climate control 224 149 152 182 216 36 150 149 134 232 , , 51 168 154 67 134 76 42 , 191 170 98 42 168 134 134 150 33 98 102 168 42 153 68 Battery, toVehicle refer Battery, Battery replacement, remote remote replacement, Battery jump starting – Beverage holder, refer to Cup belts Safety to refer Belts, Being towed to button,refer BC – refer to Braking safely Braking to refer – – breaking-in rotors Brake – two-stage replacing– bulbs Brake lamps Brake force display assistant Brake for or telephone Bracket Cup to refer holder, Bottle websiteBMW Service settings" "BMW maintenance BMW homepage BMW "BMW Contact "BMW Contact" – updating TeleService– assistance roadside – services offered – displaying– vehicle data contacting– BMWCustomer – concierge service activating – AssistBMW Assist" "BMW "Bluetooth" toAir volume refer Blower, Blind, refer to Sun blinds battery access control for comfort holders Computer in adapter in mobile phone, refer toSnap- holders system Numbers" Relations 239 37 222 212 108 108 193 192 194 87 188 175 67 184 189 225 114 191 4 190 224 80 184 4 216 189 87 192 190 115 195 193 105 45 99

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z Button for starting engine, for Button Brightness ofControl Buttons steering on wheel "Brightness" Break-in period Breaking-in the differential, Breaking-in the clutch Breaking-in brake pads Breakdown services, refer to Mobility M Breakdown, Braking safely – warning lamp – disk brakes – breaking-in brake– pads system Brake – warning lamps safely Braking to refer – – handbrake – electronic brake-force CBC – Cornering Brake – breaking-in – brake force display brake assistant – Antilock Brake ABS – Brakes California Proposition California Proposition 65 C "Call" – starting – rejecting – in absence – ending displaying– accepted – accepting Call refer to Start/Stop toStart/Stop refer button Display differential refer to Engine and Assistance Roadside System distribution Control System Warning 182 181 76 181 79 217 79 , 6 181 193 240 181 58 114 183 114 76 115 114 114 79 114 115 81 114 , 13 91 80 87 183 114 224 114 115 11 56 Can holder, refer refer Can holder, to Cup – redialing 8list Top – from book phone – from – byentering phone Calling – opening with remote remote with opening – outside from – opening inside from – opening refer to – opening/closing, – emergency release – capacity Cargo bay bag ski with – securing – securing – refer to Cargo loading Cargo – refer to Caring for your Care Data" "Car Car-care products, refer to for Caring to refer care, Car battery, refer Car to Vehicle Capacities Caring for plastic, refer to the Caring for light-alloy wheels, Caring for leather, refer to artificial for Caring leather, – socket holders number control lid Luggage compartment vehicle brochure brochure Caring for your vehicle your vehicle brochure battery brochure Caring for your vehicle vehicle brochure refer to Caring for your brochure Caring for your vehicle vehicle brochure refer to Caring for your 33 213 109 31 222 108 181 232 183 117 232 68 183 182 34 33 111 33 116 CBS Condition Based CBS Condition CBC CorneringBrake "Categories" Catalytic converter, to refer – also refer to Caring for your Car wash Car radio, refer to Radio – volume control – tone – switching on/off selecting– track a track a sampling – atrack – repeating sequence – random – fast forward/reverse – controls CD player – volume control – tone – switching on/off selecting– track a selecting– CD a tracks – sampling atrack – repeating sequence – random location – installation – fast forward/reverse – controls CD changer "CD" Car key, referCar key, Keys/remote to finish, vehicle for Caring the Caring for the carpet, refer to – refer– separate to operating Mobile phonerefer– to to refer location, – installation Car phone Service Control Hot exhaust system vehicle brochure control vehicle brochure your for Caring to refer brochure Caring for your vehicle instructions Center armrest 149 28 149 149 , 116 79 212 148 148 162 162 174 162 160 149 149 163 106 164 148 148 163 164 163 165 165 165 165 166 166 166 114 174 152 Changing scale for for scale Changing on Changing language – refer to Parts and – refer to For your own Changes, technical access comfort – system locking Central outside from – – frominside locking Central "Central locking" Center console Center brake lamp – rear – front Center armrest Child restraint fixing system system fixing restraint Child Checking the air pressure, Cap Check Gas "Check Control Check Control button CHECK Changing wheels on ofmeasure units Changing Child seats, refer to Child-safety lock systems restraint Child Cigarette lighter socket, refer refer lighterCigarette socket, lighterCigarette Caring to refer parts, Chrome Chock Chime, refer to Check navigation Control Display accessories safety LATCH pressure refer to Tire inflation messages" Control Display safely Transporting children devices to Connecting electrical for your vehicle brochure Control 110 106 220 53 5 71 54 109 200 138 32 73 6 30 71 72 14 198 108 55 36 30 77 76 203 216 , 219 29 53 – replacing battery, remote Comfort access toStartingCold refer start, Compartment for remote for remote Compartment – refer to CD player – refer to CD changer Compact Disc "Communication" EDC with "Comfort" toAround area, refer Comfort "Concert hall", refer to Tone Tone to refer hall", "Concert – hour signal on Control – displays – clock Computer Compressed audio files to refer Compartments, Condensation, refer to When When to refer Condensation, Concierge service "Concierge" Confirmation signals for for signals Confirmation "Confirmation" Condition Based Service Cockpit Clothes hooks Closing fuel filler cap outside – from inside – from Closing and date – setting time – hour signal format – 12h/24h Clock "Climate" Cleaning, refer toCaring for control engine lock Ignition to refer control, the center console control Display compartments Storage vehicle is parked locking and unlocking CBS your vehicle brochure 67 56 212 67 10 57 37 151 68 47 67 , 192 75 75 32 98 30 108 31 36 75 180 192 116 162 82 14 198 162 , 75 190 162 31 107 Cooling system, refer to refer system, Cooling function, automatic Cooling Cornering Brake Control Copyright Curb weight, refer weight, to Curb Cup holders Cruising range Cruise control Cradle for telephone or mobile Courtesy lamps for destination of Country Connecting car vacuum Connecting car Consumption, refer to referConsumption, Consumption statistics, refer statistics,Consumption Control Center, refer to guidance"Continue to Control Display, refer to Cooling fluid, to Cooling refer Cooling, maximum – temperature – checking level Coolant sunroof glass and windows – – windows sunroof glass – Convenient operation toCockpit refer Controls, iDrive to refer Controller, off/on switching – setting– brightness Coolant climate control CBC Weights phone navigation electrical devices cleaner, refer to Connecting consumption Average fuel consumption Averageto fuel iDrive destination?" iDrive Coolant comfort access with 79 16 16 241 211 106 211 211 2 232 30 125 108 66 65 68 68 68 30 137 96 211 100 21 100 109 76 37 16 10

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z "Customer – storing – entering – displaying position Current "Current position" Cylinders, refer to Engine Engine to refer Cylinders, "Delete all numbers" for "Delete address book"for refer to position, Defrost to refer windshield, Defrosting Defrostingand windows Defrosting windows luggage– compartment lid sunroof glass – filler fuel – door – door lock Defect Decommissioning thevehicle, "Deactivated" DBC Dynamic Brake Control, lampsDaytime running "Daytime running lamps" "Date format" setting – – date format Date "Date" – weights – engine dimensions– technical Data, Dashboard, referto D Relations" data mobile phone system navigation windows Defrosting windows Defrosting removing condensation vehicle brochure refer to Caring for your warning lamp Cockpit 230 76 230 76 132 232 10 132 32 242 143 184 76 231 76 44 230 40 198 81 183 , 192 143 99 133 99 99 93 93 99 34 Digital radio, refer to High High to refer radio, Digital Digital clock "Dial number" "Dial"for mobile phone audio in "Details" driven recently Destinations Destination list for – volumeofvoice – voice instructions – terminating/continuing Direction instructions, refer to Directional indicators, refer to Dimensions "Delete"mobile for "Delete data" for navigation – selecting from address – entry – entering via voice – destination list Destination for navigation – entering – deleting address Destination – changing specified specified – changing – canceling voice – bypassing route Destination guidance – storing – selecting using – starting – interrupting arrival and – distance route – displaying Definition Radio mode to navigation instructions Voice instructions Voice Turn signals phone system book route instructions sections information 130 124 132 134 164 183 131 133 136 133 124 140 , 231 130 67 170 129 136 140 50 , 181 62 127 130 137 156 127 139 139 136 136 181 136 Door locking, confirmation confirmation locking, Door lock Door "Door locks" "Door Directory, refer to Phone Phone to refer Directory, Directory for navigation, refer for navigation, Directory Display,refer iDrive to "Display" toEnginerefer Displacement, Direct selection buttons Display elements, refer to Display lighting, Display refer to Displaying vehicle data Displays on the windshield, – battery of remote control Disposal Distance to destination, refer refer todestination, Distance dest." to "Distance to refer Distance, – vehicle battery – coolant – on Control Display, refer to Displays off" "Display "Display settings" "Display refer– Instrument to Distance warning, refer to Door key, refer to Keys/ to refer key, Door lighting entry Door Divided rear backrest, refer to signals control remote book to Address book controls data Instrument cluster Instrument Instrument lighting refer to Head-Up Display Head-Up to refer with comfort access with comfort to Computer Computer iDrive cluster Control DistancePDC Park system Through-loading 230 182 16 12 31 211 110 78 76 32 16 68 21 30 68 222 28 76 131 96 68 12 , 96 89 37 195 21 89 Drinks holder, refer refer to Cup holder, Drinks ventilation Draft-free Grades Quality DOT – remotecontrol – manualoperation Doors Eject button, refer to Buttons button,refer to Buttons Eject – "Sport" – "Normal" – "Comfort" ElectronicEDC Damping "EDC" – backrestwidth entry/exit Easy E "DSC" Dryingair, therefer Cooling to Dry air, refer to Cooling Driving tips, refer to General Drivingwater through control stability Driving to refer route, Driving Driving programs, refer to Driving lamps,referParking to DVD for navigation malfunction – – indicatorlamp DSC Dynamic Stability only" door "Driver's Drive mode Drivelogic "Dynamic route" for for route" "Dynamic Dynamic Stability Control – – M Dynamic Mode MDM holders in area of CD player Control function function driving notes systems Displaying route Drivelogic lamps/low beams Control navigation DSC 80 51 51 82 82 80 108 , 61 100 100 79 80 82 60 61 82 134 81 49 114 13 43 30 137 , 122 32 92 80 30 202 101 148 115 80 Emergency release for – glass sunroof Emergency operation, refer to – luggage compartment lid door filler – fuel – driver's door lock– door Emergency operation, refer to Electronic Damping Control Electronic brake-force Electric steering wheel – luggage compartment lid glass– sunroof, electric door filler – fuel – driver's door lock– door malfunction Electrical – starting, with comfort comfort – starting, with – starting – speed – overheated, referCoolant to Engine Dynamic – M – data – breaking-in Engine Engaging drive position, refer call" "End "Enable services" "Enabled services" Emergency services, refer to Emergency request Engine coolant Engine compartment – switching off cargo bay luggage compartmentlid in Moving manually operation Manual EDC distribution adjustment access temperature Control positions to Selector lever Assistance Roadside 230 82 230 36 57 59 182 32 32 60 34 114 49 79 32 32 66 57 211 40 198 198 195 195 223 207 224 40 34 34 Entertainment sound output sound Entertainment "Entertainment" Entering zip code for for town/city Entering Entering the intersection, Entering Entering destination via town/ "Enter address" to starting, refer Engine to Engine speed,Engine refer overheating,Engine refer to output, toEngineEngine refer "Engine oil level" gauge temperature – – temperature displays possible – oil grades,to Approved– refer – oil change interval changes, – between – fast measurement – checking oil level "Equalizer", refer to Tone Entry map for destination Equalizer, refer to Tone Tone to refer Equalizer, ESP ElectronicStability "ESN" – approved– engine oil additives, refer – to Approved adding– Engine oil on/off navigation navigation address navigation city name engineStarting data temperature Coolant data engine oils requirements refer to Service control control Control Stability Dynamic Program, refer to DSC engine oils 230 230 159 149 243 210 151 151 80 124 125 210 125 125 126 210 210 , 67 127 69 124 148 209 57 208 208 209 , 67 131 210 66 128

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z Eye for tow-starting and tow-starting for Eye External audio device tilting– downpassenger-side Exhaust system, refer toHot Recorders Data Event – folding in and out automatic – heating automatic– dimming – adjusting Exterior mirrors "Fader", refer to Tone F Fader, referFader, Tone to – refer to Avoiding Avoiding to refer – alarm False to refer messages, Failure First aid, refer to First-aid toCaringrefer for Fine wood, refer toMicrofilter/ Filter, wheel into sealant Filling Filling bottle, to refer Filler neck for washer fluid with up calling "Favorites", "Fast route"for Fastest route for – warning lamp to refer belts, safety Fastening off refer toSwitching – fitting Tow to refer towing, mirror exterior exhaust system feature control control unintentional alarms Check Control kit your vehicle brochure filter activated-charcoal System Mobility M radio navigation navigation Safety belts alarm 224 156 35 225 150 150 49 48 244 134 134 45 46 48 48 71 114 48 48 217 107 213 36 218 101 64 Footbrake, refer to Braking Fold-over rear backrest Folding rear backrest FM, waveband Footwell lamps, refer to Front airbags Front Freeway, refer to Route For your ownsafety player – CD changer – CD Forward, fast "FM", reception reception "FM", Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler refer to Floor mats/carpets, for Caring to refer mat, Floor lamp – warning – system limits chains – snow – initializing system alarms – false Flat Tire Monitor – during locking/unlocking, Flashing First-aid kit – warning lamp – warning – TPMTire Pressure – spare wheel – refer to Tire condition – MMobility System – FlatTire Monitor – changing wheels Flat tire Flashlight, refer to signal – triple turn safely Interior lamps criteria range fluid neck washer for brochure Caring for your vehicle your vehicle brochure signals Setting confirmation to refer Monitor Rechargeable flashlight Rechargeable activation 149 115 134 31 84 224 166 63 , 152 87 83 166 220 204 152 83 84 84 96 83 , 83 219 86 83 5 84 , 110 84 64 , 202 110 217 106 Garage door opener, refer to G Gasoline, refer to Required Required refer to Gasoline, Gear display, refer to Displays changes Gear Gasoline display, refer to Fuel – manual transmission – manual lever Gearshift Front passenger airbags, airbags, passenger Front refer Frontto armrest, Center – tank contents, refer refer to – tankcontents, – specifications – quality – high-quality brands – display consumption – average Fuel Tire Flat refer to FTM, "FTM" Front adjustment seat – releasing in the event of Fuel filler door Fuel display, refer to Fuel Fuel consumption display, Fuel clock, refer to Fuel Fuses to refer display, screen Full Fullpreparation mobile phone control Integrated universalremote fuel in instrument cluster instrument in gauge deactivating front armrest, Capacities Monitor electrical malfunction gauge consumption fuel average Computer, to refer gauge window off window assistance Switching package 199 199 222 84 67 67 67 199 67 104 83 174 232 21 61 88 198 60 106 199 68 199 42 58 61 198 68 – convenient operation with convenient– operation from convenient– Glass sunroof, electric General driving notes Hands-free system, refer to to refer system, Hands-free refer to lamp, Hand – indicatorlamp Handbrake H – moving manually moving – HD radio, refer to High High to refer radio, HD "HD radio" Hazard warning flashers Ground clearance Gross vehicle weight, referto Ventilation to refer Grills, to navigation, refer GPS flashlight rechargeable – – lighting Glove compartment – remotecontrol – filler neck for washer washer for neck filler – – cleaning tank,refer to Wiper refer cleaning,– to – care, refer to Caring for your Headlamps flasher Headlamp Headlamp control, airbags Head Head Light, refer to Adaptive Light, toAdaptive refer Head comfort access outside Microphone flashlight Rechargeable Definition Radio Weights systemNavigation fluid Capacities system vehicle brochure automatic Head Light 207 106 63 32 232 156 58 92 92 232 94 87 14 13 30 37 62 116 156 , 40 58 106 122 114 38 15 106 101 106 Hot exhaust system Horn Hood Homepage ofBMW "Home address" for Holdercups for Hills High water, refer to Driving High Definition Radio lamp – indicator flasher – headlamp High beams assistant High-beam Heavy cargo, refer to Securing Heating with engine switched – steering wheel – seats heat – residual window – rear – interior – exterior mirrors Heating – steering wheel – seats window – rear – mirrors Heated lights– shift view – M view – default Head-Up Display "High-beam assistant" "High-beam – steering wheel – seats Height adjustment refer to Height, "Head-Up Display" "Head-Up – sitting safely – removing head – active front Head restraints navigation system through water cargo heat Residual to refer off, Dimensions restraints 115 10 206 100 46 46 42 117 97 89 97 48 45 44 94 62 90 231 99 99 41 100 44 108 13 115 49 49 49 48 89 94 51 4 114 133 94 156 , 96 89 IBOC, Definition toHigh refer IBOC, I – recommended– tire mark Identification on to Information tag, refer ID3 Ice, toOutside refer Ignition key position 1, refer to to 1, refer position Ignition key Ignition key, toKeys/ refer – switched on – switched off Ignition – symbols information status – – start menu setting– brightness item menu selecting – operating– principle – displays, menus – controls – controller or selection confirming – changing– units of measure changing– settings changing– menu page changing– language changing– date and time automatic– climate control – assistance window iDrive Idle – tire coding Hydroplaning assistant, brake Hydraulic "House number" for "Hour memo" Radio brands track temperature warning Radio readiness remote control entry type displayand with expanded scope refer to Brake assistant toBrake refer destination entry 60 16 164 19 56 156 245 204 16 18 16 201 17 115 56 57 75 28 17 56 76 126 74 20 76 17 20 77 19 19 67 98 80 75

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z Information menu, refer to refer menu, Information "Information" fornavigation location destination on – on – position current on location– another Information Info menu Pressure Tire TPM to refer – Monitor Tire Flat to refer – Inflation pressure monitoring toTire refer Inflation pressure, Indicator and warning lamps, TPMTire– Pressure – safety belt warning beams lamps/low parking – M – Dynamic Mode starting with engine comfort – Ignition lock to refer 2, position Ignition key "Info sources" on "Information – DSC – brake system airbags – Antilock Brake ABS – lamps Indicator/warning Imprint – MDrive high– beams Flat– Tire Monitor i menu imenu system Monitor inflation pressure overview Monitor access Ignition on destination" System 13 17 2 17 13 37 89 , 129 81 84 86 17 80 13 246 , 56 56 51 13 131 70 81 84 200 13 129 46 129 , 80 129 83 13 Integrated universal remote Integrated key – refer to Instrument – refer to Cockpit Instrument panel Instrument lighting – switching on with remote remote with on – switching Interior lamps time" "Interim Interesting destinationfor Intermittent mode of the Intermittent ofthe mode dimming – automatic Interior rearview mirror off – switching sensor Interior motion Jumpering, refer to Jump Joystick, refer to iDrive Jacking points J Jump starting Instrument cluster Instructions for navigation – mobile phone DVD navigation for drive – changer – CD location Installation map" "Input – seat, mirror and steering toSetting time and – refer – refer to Power failure – radio, refer to Storing – FlatTire Monitor Initializing control cluster control navigation wipers feature starting instructions toVoice refer system, wheel memory date stations 75 63 12 104 31 49 224 154 129 129 166 139 96 224 74 28 36 220 106 43 10 12 83 96 35 222 49 16 122 Last destinations, refer to Lashing eyes, refer to – for navigation "Languages" – for navigation – for navigation "Lighting" Lighter Light-emitting diodes License platelamp, replacing refer to Length, light-emitting LEDs fixing restraint child LATCH pos." seat "Last "Language / Units" "Language bulbs and Lamps lamps/low Parking to refer – High-beam to refer – Lamps L Comfort to refer Keyless-Go, K Key Memory, refer to Personal Personal to refer Memory, Key Keyless opening and closing, Knock control Knock key – spare settings, – key-related refer to Keys "Keypad" Destination list Destination Securing cargo system system LEDs bulbs Dimensions diodes system beams assistant access Profile access Comfort to refer Personal Profile 28 108 214 217 28 92 214 36 123 123 54 184 63 94 28 , , 77 231 199 139 139 44 130 117 214 28 76 , 77 36 – without key, refer to Comfort key, toComfort – refer without outside from – – frominside – confirmationsignals Locking inLock the buttons doors, "Lock after driving" Load securing equipment, – vehicle – stowingcargo – securingcargo Loading "Limit" Light switch – of the vehicle, refer to – lampsbulbs and – instruments Lighting Lower back support, refer to to refer support, back Lower – indicatorlamp automatic – Low beams outside from – – frominside – confirmationsignals doors unlocking and Locking – – locking with remote – emergencyrelease access comfort – lid compartment Luggage – wrench – tightening torque, to refer Lug bolts – opening with remote with opening – outside from opening – – openinginside from – unlocking and locking from from locking and unlocking – access refer to Locking refer to Securing cargo Lamps Lumbar support Lumbar control mountingAfter control inside 73 32 30 116 92 36 30 31 220 220 92 92 92 33 32 96 30 30 117 13 117 221 37 33 42 214 33 34 33 31 31 33 117 33 Master key, refer to Keys/ Map view facing north entry – destination scale – changing Map fornavigation north" facing "Map Map display oftravel" direction "Map – tow-starting transmission Manual – luggage compartment lid – glass sunroof door filler – fuel – driver's door lock– door operation Manual radio the on "Manual" air distribution Manual Malfunction warnings, refer to Maintenance system – refer to Warranty and – refer to Service – refer to Service and Maintenance Winter to refer tires, M+S Mobility System M Sport" 500 – "P 500" – "P 400" – "P Engine Dynamic Control M – indicator lamp – indicator Dynamic Mode MDM M M LW, waveband LW, Lumbar support Luggage rack, refer toRoof- remote control remote Check Control Canadian models Service Guide Booklet for requirements Booklet for US models Warranty Information tires mounted luggage rackmounted luggage 204 59 59 32 138 212 226 32 152 40 198 69 59 13 42 71 28 138 , 128 217 138 212 80 58 212 153 138 99 80 118 138 212 34 59 – memory, refer to Seat, mirror mirror toSeat, refer memory, – – heating out and in folding – automatic monitor – curb Mirrors Mirror dimming feature – for voice command – for telephone – touch dialing,– tone to refer – Top 8 operating separate to refer – – redialing operation– iDrive via – operation by voice – missed calls refer installation to location, – – ending call calling – – adjusting volume accepted– calls Mobile phone Missed calls calls" "Missed Maximum speed with winter Maximum cooling Measurements, referto "M Dynamic Mode" MDrive MDM, refer to M Dynamic Memory, refer to Seat, mirror mirror Seat, to refer Memory, Message list for traffic traffic list for Message Menus, refer to iDrive toStart buttonrefer MENU, Microphone Microfilter memory steeringand wheel system Tone dialingmethod instructions Center armrest tires Dimensions Mode memory steeringand wheel information menu 204 48 50 183 17 80 247 181 48 14 43 43 101 183 183 181 141 231 183 182 14 183 106 100 180 48 80 185 180 16 184 49 48

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z Monitoringpressure tires, of Monitor,refer iDrive to Mobility System battery Mobile phone Multi-function steering wheel, steering Multi-function interface USB/audio – – compressed audio files MP3 recentMost mobile phone on/off" "Monitor – refer to Turn signals/ Turn to refer – Multifunction switch – random random – play sequence – finding Music tracks system Wiper to refer – MW, waveband "M view" "M View" off" / on "Mute scan sampling, – – entering– manually Navigation destination "Navigation" N Navigation instructions, refer Navigation DVD installation drive, Navigation map via selecting – – home address refer toFlatTire Monitor wheel onsteering toButtons refer numbers headlamp flasher instructions on/off Switchingvoiceto location 11 164 90 90 122 183 248 68 50 , 152 122 133 217 124 164 50 128 62 124 139 188 169 16 63 165 162 83 – destination guidance in – destination entry – bypassing route – address book system Navigation – entering destination via adestination – entering route – displaying – displaying current – destination list – starting destination – selecting route criteria via destination – selecting using destination – selecting special a for – searching list – route DVD – navigation – last destinations "New destination" "New address" for navigation refer toHead support, Neck voice "Navigation – volume adjustment – voice instructions – terminating/continuing to off,refer – switching "Normal" with EDC with "Normal" "Next entertainment New wheels and tires "New route" remoteNew control assistance window assistance sections voice manually position guidance map information destination system restraints instructions" destination guidance destination guidance Terminating/continuing source" 128 127 131 50 143 140 139 124 136 44 140 129 129 50 131 130 122 , 137 130 124 139 124 122 82 139 28 122 140 203 , 136 136 128 134 Octane ratings, Octane toFuelrefer Socket refer to socket, OBD O referNylon rope, toTow- toWindshieldNozzles, refer Onboard computer, refer to refer computer, Onboard destination" new for"On a Oil temperature to refer intervals, change Oil Oil, refer to Engine oil Odometer Output, refer to Engine Engine to refer Output, Orientation menu, refer to "Options" book phone – voice – redialing – placing acall – dialing phonenumber – correcting phone – commands – canceling volume – adjusting Operation by voice formobile Operating principle, iDrive lock– using door the control remote – using outside – from inside – from – comfort access closing and Opening location" "On destination" "On toolkitOnboard info" "Onboard specifications interface Diagnostics Onboard for starting towing and washer nozzles iDrive navigation system Service requirements data Start menu number phone 230 16 185 186 193 187 66 213 185 32 185 17 129 30 186 68 214 199 67 129 36 64 186 186 129 32 225 208 30 69 186 17 Parking brake,refer to Parking assistant, refer to Parkingaid, refer Park PDC to Parking, vehicle off and on switching – – preselectingactivation – LED activation activating – ventilation car Parked "Parked car ventilation" "Parked car operation" Park Distance Control PDC Panic mode Outside air, refer to AUC "P 500 Sport" "P 500" "P 400" P Parts and accessories and Parts Parking lamps/low beams, – indicatorlamp Parking lamps "PDC display on" "PDC" lightingPathway "Pathway lighting" Passenger-side exterior Outside temperature – screen display – radiocontrol principle operating – Overview computer– in measure of unit changing – Handbrake Control PDC Park Distance Distance Control directly times time control recirculated-air Automatic indicator lamp mirror, tilting down display 97 102 79 102 59 59 100 67 102 78 31 58 76 59 92 148 57 13 13 20 93 79 93 78 17 48 101 6 102 102 78 76 Plug-in unit for remote the radio on "Play" First-aid to refer Plasters, Power windows, refer to to refer windows, Power Power failure Engine POWER, refer to M "POWER" – refer to Storing current – refer to Displaying current Position toMicrofilter/ Pollen, refer Preselecting activation times – producing with MMobility Pressure, tires the on "Presets" – power windows glass– sunroof, electric Pinch system protection 8 – Top – selecting in phone book – most recent numbers – dialing phone – deleting from Phone numbers – dialing phone number – deleting entry all – deleting entries – creating and editing voice entry – changing book Phone "Phone" "Perspective" Personal Profile PDC ParkDistance Control lock Ignition to refer control, kit Windows Dynamic Control position position filter charcoal activated ventilation of the parked car System radio book phone book 224 56 152 183 183 181 176 217 132 143 51 , 37 160 180 102 , 222 178 186 138 200 183 28 182 38 , 181 59 160 183 183 182 39 101 183 78 Rain sensor storing stations, Radio with comfort – access – switched on – switched off Radio readiness toRadio refer position, Radio Radio key, refer to Keys/ to refer Band, Weather – – volume tone – control – switching on/off stations storing – with the station best – selection station – search station – selecting – frequency selecting – – satellite radio – sampling stations – High Definition Radio – controls – autostore Radio R – windows electric sunroof, glass – to function, refer Protective buttonfunction, Programming Programmable memory Programmable button on "Profile" tires, monitoring of Pressure readiness remote control flashes news Weather reception waveband manually Pinch protectionsystem button on steering wheel Programmable to refer buttons steering wheel Monitor Pressure Tire TPM to refer 249 195 149 21 84 148 38 153 154 154 56 63 148 149 56 57 159 153 , 56 50 28 152 154 148 152 153 37 154 156 39 156 50

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z "Random", random play Rear armrest, refer to Center Center to refer armrest, Rear Reading lamps "RDS" "Random directory" in audio "Random all" in audio – replacing– bulbs Rear lamps, referTailto Redialing with mobile phone mobile for "Redial" Recording times, refer to Reclining seat, refer to AUCAutomatic – – air recirculation Recirculated-air mode flashlight Rechargeable mobile of level Reception regional station – – radio stations – quality Reception "Received calls" switch safety window Rear – roller sun blind, refer to Sun – heating Rear window Rearview mirror ventilation Rear Rear socket – removing head restraints – heating folding– over backrest restraints head adjusting – seats Rear Reflectors, refer to Tail Tail to refer Reflectors, sequence armrest, rear mode mode lamps phone Stopwatch Seats recirculated-air control information phone, refer to Status blinds lamps 155 165 166 42 216 105 216 187 155 99 47 250 165 109 74 20 110 96 155 101 48 182 216 100 154 100 110 106 100 182 45 45 38 Removing condensation on – replacing battery Replacementcontrol, remote to refer tires, of Replacement Replacement fuses "Repeat track" in audio "Repeat" in audio mode "Repeat directory" in audio – malfunction – lid luggage compartment Replacing bulbs, refer to Reset, refer to Resetting tone tone toResetting Reset, refer settings – tone – stopwatch "Reset" Fuel to refer warning, Reserve Reporting defects safety Replacing wheels/tires, refer Replacing tires Residual heat todefault" with "Reset "resetting …" FTM "Relock door if not – locks, refer to Unlocking – hood Releasing Refueling – garage door opener door – garage – comfort access Remote control Remaining distanceto to refer distance, Remaining the windows the controls refer to New remote Changing wheels mode mode Lamps and bulbs settings gauge to New wheels and tires MDrive opened" Computer destination, referto Cruising range 206 165 165 84 67 51 198 151 28 32 , 85 68 74 31 100 99 151 203 28 , 68 36 37 37 214 84 219 222 104 165 7 203 36 31 – displaying streets or towns/ view map – displaying – displaying arrow display – displaying – changing criteria – changing "Route preference", toDisplaying refer map, Route to refer information, Route – selecting Rubber parts, refer to Caring Caring to refer parts, Rubber Route selection Roof-mounted luggage capacity load Roof Roadside parking lamps assistance Roadside Assistance Roadside "Roadside map Road transmission – manual gear Reverse player – CD changer – CD fast Reverse, Retreaded tires belts Safety to refer – – for children systems Restraint Rope, refer to Tow-starting toTow-starting refer Rope, Rotary/pushbutton, refer refer Rotary/pushbutton, to – bypassing sections Route cities changing map view instructions voice with guidance Destination for your vehicle brochure rack Assistance" and towingand iDrive 134 118 139 16 138 134 140 134 138 166 137 225 53 60 166 184 203 134 , 134 232 190 139 190 140 224 45 138 58 94 137 "Save current "SAT" with radio channel storing– channel selecting – channel enabling– Satellite radio – safety belts – drivingstability control – airbags – ABS AntilockBrake systems Safety belts toSafety – refer Airbags to refer – belt tensioners Safety – warninglamp – sitting safely – refer to Caring for your – damage Safety belts Safety S "Seat heater distribution" heater "Seat Satelliterefer to SDARS, Screw thread for tow iDrive refer Screen, to "Scan directory" in audio "Scan all" in audio mode – radio player– CD changer– CD Scan – stations with radio – music tracks on CD "Scan" destination" systems System vehicle brochure radio fitting mode 5 153 159 164 225 87 79 46 79 164 45 45 164 159 133 41 46 149 160 87 159 160 153 , 164 45 16 159 164 47 Selection options with with options Selection route Selecting items menu Selecting frequency Selecting refer sources, audio Selecting "Select current speed" as "Select – with ski bag,refer to – refer to Securing cargo Securing load – ventilation, refer toActive – storing setting the – storing – sitting safely support – shoulder mirror Seat, refer to – memory, – lumbar support – heating – easy entry/exit – adjusting thigh support the seats – adjusting shoulder – adjusting – adjusting height – adjusting backrest width width backrest – active Seats navigation system manually via iDrive to Operation destination" Securing cargo ventilation seat memory and steering wheel support adjustment 42 46 42 43 153 43 130 41 134 43 42 47 111 42 , 42 193 43 134 42 19 74 148 117 42 42 – for unlocking – for MDrive – for BMW Assist "Settings" Service,refer Roadside to Sequential mode tow-starting – to refer system, initializing – – idle – Drivelogic driving Sequential Manual – towing – shiftlock shift– lights – Sequential mode gear reverse – Service and Warranty – refer to CBS Condition Condition CBS to refer – Service Interval Display "Service Info" – refer to CBS Condition Condition CBS to refer – Service requirements "Service "Service Request" Service to refer – Setting button, button, to Setting refer "Set time" "Set service date" "Set date" – on trip computer in– audio mode "Set" Assistance tires After changing wheels/ programs Drivelogic Transmission with Smodels US Information Booklet for Based Service Based Service requirements" requirements Controls, controller 60 204 251 226 60 195 75 76 61 59 62 51 212 224 70 227 60 30 69 149 212 212 70 , 60 193 191 71 69 184 60 , 191 16 69 , , 209 191 , 209

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z Settings menu, to menu, refer Settings – units of measure – language – date to refer configuring, – to refer configuring, – – clock, 12h/24h mode changing– on Control Settings Shift paddles onsteering Shiftlock lightsShift Shifting into drive position, Shifting to refer time, Setting Short route in navigation, refer refer navigation, in route Short "Short route"for Short commands of voice refer control, absorber Shock Shoulder support Side window blinds, refer to signals,Side-mounted turn Side marker lamps, replacing Side airbags – CD player – CD changer toRandom refer Shuffled, destination "Show current position" "Show imenu Personal Profile MDrive Display wheel positions lever Selector to refer times Preselecting activation to Selectingto route navigation system command Control to EDC ElectronicDamping Sun blinds replacing bulbs bulbs position" 76 216 102 61 61 17 60 50 74 82 62 77 129 60 252 165 134 87 105 165 216 42 28 76 134 233 75 129 Socket for Onboard Snow chains – using – wheel, driving with spare – key – fuses – adapter for spare key Spare – right/left balance fader – front/rear Sound distribution in audio referSOS, toInitiating an to onCD, refer Song search refer to aid, Soft closure Sockets, refer to Connecting Socket for remote control, – wheel, refer to Changing refer to Changing – wheel, Specified oil grades, refer to Approved to refer oils, Special Sliding/tilt to refer sunroof, Ski bag belts safety – with restraint head – with airbags – with Sitting safely Signal horn, refer to Horn – mounting/removing adapter Snap-in Drivelogic" "SMG Sequential to refer SMG, to refer assistant, Slope Diagnostics interface Diagnostics wheel mode emergency request tracks Sampling soft closing Automatic electrical devices refer to Ignition lock wheels Approved engine oils engine oils Glass sunroof, electric sunroof, Glass Drivelogic Manual Transmission with assistant Starting 28 222 174 110 221 219 59 210 204 41 41 150 51 41 164 150 109 82 41 , 188 223 62 56 28 210 213 38 33 10 Status ofthis Owner's Manual Status information onControl "Status" Station, refer toRadio inspection" "State for /Province" "State "Start Service" for "Start service" guidance" route "Start iDrive Start menu, toStarting refer – onslopes, – on a slippery surface Starting off referStarting difficulties, to Starting assistant to refer Starting assistance, Starting to refer Starting, "Speed volume", tone Speedometer Speed limit warning, refer to Speed limit Speed-dependent "Start guidance" "Start stopwatch for "Start" – switching off the engine – starting engine the button Start/Stop Stability control, refer to EDC with "Sport" Speed with winter tires at time ofprinting Display entry destination Assist BMW assistant starting Jump starting Jump engine control Speed limit volume systems control stability Driving 70 57 150 150 20 79 82 73 73 12 192 191 224 224 127 56 82 82 17 71 125 5 57 , 74 136 152 82 129 204 57 – buttons on steering buttons – refer adjustment, – automatic – adjustment Steering wheel – heating – easy entry/exit Summer tires, refer to Wheels destination for "Street" Storing tires refer Storing sitting position, Storing radio stations Storing current position "Store" on theradio "Store in address book" for compartments Storage Stopwatch "Stopwatch" stopwatch for "Stop" buttons, shift Steering-wheel button" "Steering wheel paddles shift – button programmable – memory – button MDrive – refer– lock, toIgnition lock Switching off engine Switching automatically Switches, refer toCockpit SW, waveband "Surround Settings", referto Sun blinds wheel memory to Steering wheel and tires and entry wheel memory mirror steering to Seat, and system navigation refer to Shift paddles beam assistant beam low beams, refer to High- between high and beams Tone control 126 11 49 43 43 200 105 74 204 74 49 61 150 152 50 49 43 94 , 151 155 132 57 74 154 61 107 50 132 , 50 161 10 56 Target cursor for Tank contents, refer to – replacing bulbs Tail lamps Tachometer T – changing units of units – changing with automatic – adjusting – adjusting in upper body Temperature TeleService list" "Telephone – refer to Mobile phone to refer location, – installation Telephone refer to Telematics, – dimensions – capacities Technical data Technical to alterations, refer – refer to Coolant – traffic information with with information – traffic information – status system – navigation – indicator/warning lamps Symbols to refer headlamps, Swiveling signal hour on Switching – radio player – CD changer – CD – audio on Switching navigation Capacities measure climate control region Center armrest Assist BMW For your ownsafety temperature navigation system Light Head Adaptive 148 148 98 4 216 76 148 232 191 129 66 232 231 148 189 66 230 50 98 216 106 20 142 140 5 94 174 75 13 Tire Pressure Monitor Tire replacement, new wheels Grading Quality Tire – changing units of Temperature display Tempomat, refer to Cruise Cruise to refer Tempomat, Temperature gauge, engine outside temperature – outside temperature – "Theater", refer to Tone "Text language" "Terminate services" Timer, refer to Preselecting "Time format" "Time" Tilting downpassenger-side – switching off Tilt alarmsensor Tightening torque lug ofthe Through-loading system to lamp, refer brake Third The individual vehicle Tire pressure loss Tire inflation pressures "Timer 2" for parked-car "Timer 1" for parked-car TPM and tires measure control oil warning control activation times activation mirror exterior mounting toAfter bolts, refer Centerlamp brake ventilation ventilation 67 84 75 253 65 151 67 203 76 221 102 102 75 36 48 77 35 102 84 201 216 , 194 5 85 66 200 110

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z – flat refer tire, – to Changing – damage – condition – changing – breaking-in – air loss – age Tires Tire trouble, changing – winter tires – wheel/tire combination – wear indicators – tread – size retreaded– tires – replacing – pressure monitoring, refer to – pressure monitoring, refer to – new wheels and tires – M Mobility System pressure inflation – Tools, refer to Onboard Onboard to refer Tools, locking/unlocking on Tone middle– setting – adjusting Tone in mode audio Tone dialing method "Tone" refer toTraffic station, TMC – lug bolts,– refer toAfter Torque for 8" "Top mobile phone Tow fitting Tow bar Tow Touch tonedialing, refer to data Engine to refer – wheels wheels Monitor TirePressureTPM Flat Tire Monitor toolkit information mounting Tone dialing method 201 201 202 149 214 226 84 219 219 84 203 225 219 149 203 202 , 221 254 86 204 114 140 151 203 202 83 200 217 184 230 184 203 203 182 31 – during destination – displaying map route in – depiction for information Traffic Traction control, refer to DSC to refer width, Track CD with – selecting CD on – sampling sequence – random Tracks lamp – warning – system limits system – resetting TPM Tire Pressure "TPM" Tow-starting – refer to Bypassing route traffic – displaying jam Traffic Info settings" "Traffic – symbols "Town / City" for destination Manual – with Sequential Manual – with Sequential manual – with fittings – tow – methods Towing Tow rope guidance navigation Control Dynamic Stability Dimensions Monitor sections information entry Drivelogic Transmission with Transmission transmission 85 125 225 80 226 84 142 140 226 143 141 226 140 225 225 140 231 226 85 86 226 164 85 163 165 141 142 – replacing bulbs lamp – indicator Turn signals – replacing bulbs Turning lamps – Sequential – Sequential Manual gear – reverse transmission – manual – idle – Drivelogic – breaking-in Transmission Transporting children – tow-starting – towing assistant – starting – shift lights Treble, refer to Tone Treble, toTone refer Treaddepth, refer Minimum to device, securing Transport Turning circle, refer to to refer circle, Turning Trunk, refer to Cargo bay Trip odometer Trip meter, also refer to Trip "Triplesignal" turn meter Trip to refer – computer Trip to refer – Trip-distance counter Trip computer computer" "Trip "Treble", tonecontrol Drivelogic with Transmission safely control tread tire cargo Securing to refer Dimensions computer 60 53 225 149 202 69 61 59 62 62 114 231 226 60 69 66 94 12 69 216 215 82 63 66 150 58 69 117 Uniform Tire Grading/ Tire Uniform Quality referprotection, Underbody to "Unchanged" U – averagefuel Units "Units" Universal garage-door – temperature – without key, refer to Comfort key, toComfort – refer without outside from – – frominside Unlocking "Unlock button" control Universal remote "USB" in audio mode interface USB/audio Shift to refer display, Upshift "Update services" Using turn signals referbatteryto Replacing– – refer to Disposal batteries Used "Use current location as UTQR brochure Caring for your vehicle consumption control remote universal opener, refer to Integrated access lights address" 76 62 201 36 104 132 33 51 76 30 , 76 133 30 , 62 62 222 193 169 170 104 37 Voice phone book phone Voice – volume – switching on/off "Vehicle / Tires" for – weights for Caring to refer – washing, – parking – measurements, refer to – loading your for Caring to refer care, – – care – breaking-in – battery Vehicle to refer caps, screw Valve V – repeating – muting Voice instructions for – short commands – overview system command Voice Voice, refer to Destination Viscosity settings" "Vent – refer to Ventilation climate control – automatic outlets Vent stationary – while rear – in – draft-free Ventilation to refer position, Vehicle – jacking points Vehicle jack unlocking your vehicle brochure Dimensions vehicle brochure mounting After navigation system instructions guidance with voice position Displaying current 213 101 50 222 140 116 57 210 232 143 23 101 101 50 30 220 97 114 139 231 , 140 99 220 221 101 50 186 233 139 101 , 139 97 Water on roads, refer to container,Waste refer to Washing the vehicle, also refer capacity ofthe – reservoir Washer fluid Service and Guide Warranty Warning triangle Warning messages, refer to Warning lamps, refer to W Wear indicators in tires, refer "WB" forWaveband radio Wheels and tires Wheelbase, refer to Wheel/tire damage Wheel/tire combination, refer "Welcome light" lamps Welcome Weights Website BMW flashes news Weather – fuel tank,refer fuel to – – cargo bay – audio sources Volume – setting speed- setting – mobile– phone – windshield– system, cleaning instructions voice – Driving through water Ashtray brochure vehicle your for Caring to models Booklet for Canadian Check Control lamps Indicator and warning to Minimum tread depth Dimensions Newto wheelstires and Capacities dependent refer toCapacities refer 149 148 255 13 232 212 108 , 156 232 232 64 150 231 4 180 148 92 71 93 223 200 203 140 152 232 156 115 64 202 203

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z – filler – for neck washer – capacities, reservoir toRain automatic, refer – wash Windshield toHead-Up displays, refer – refer defrosting, to – – cleaning, refer to Wiper Windshield switch safety – convenient– withoperation convenient– from operation convenient– operation Windows Width, refer to – windshield washer – washer fluid Windshield wipers, refer refer wipers, to Windshield – wiper system – windshield washer – washer fluid – rain sensor Wiper system – replacement – care, refer Caring to for your blades Wiper – storage limit speed setting – Winter tires wiper– blade – care, refer Caring to for your "With highways" for fluid sensor Display windows Defrosting system accesscomfort outside Dimensions nozzles Wiper system nozzles vehicle brochure replacement vehicle brochure navigation system navigation 207 63 63 89 204 37 32 64 64 256 204 63 64 64 231 63 214 214 38 63 63 37 134 73 232 99 30 – settings, refer to Personal toMDrive refer – settings, – programmable button on Your individual vehicle Y – replacing bulbs Xenon lamps X Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer Working in the engine Word matching principle for referWood decoration, to Profile steering wheel to Onboard toolkit to Onboard compartment navigation brochure Caring for your vehicle 28 135 215 206 50 215 214 50

*BL001423800M* bmwusa.com More about BMW Driving Machine Driving The Ultimate The

01 41 0 014 238 ue